DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING:

TIRUPATI-517502

R-20 – Scheme of Instructions effective from the academic year 2020 – 2021

Programme Scheme

SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(AUTONOMOUS)

SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY

TIRUPATI-517502 (A.P), INDIA.

1
Vision of the Department:

To be a lead department imparting quality and value embedded higher

education and research emphasizing freedom of learning and practice.

Mission of the Department:

1. Transforming students into full-fledged professionals and to become

leaders in dynamic global environment.
2. Augmenting knowledge and technologies in rapidly advancing fields of
Electronics and Communication Engineering.
3. Promoting in depth research and create centre of excellence in thrust areas.

2
 PROGRAM OUTCOMES

1. PO1- Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics,

science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the
solution of complex engineering problems related to Electronics &
Communication and Engineering.
2. PO2- Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and
analyze complex engineering problems related to Electronics &
Communication Engineering and reaching substantiated conclusions using
first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. PO3- Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex
engineering problems related to Electronics & Communication Engineering
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural,
societal, and environmental considerations.
4. PO4- Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based
knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis
and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.
5. PO5- Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,
resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and
modelling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations.
6. PO6- The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual
knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
consequent responsibilities relevant to the Electronics & Communication
Engineering professional engineering practice.
7. PO7- Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the
Electronics & Communication Engineering professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the
knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
8. PO8- Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
9. PO9- Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and
as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. PO10- Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering
activities with the engineering community and with society at large, such as,
being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design

3
 documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
11. PO11- Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these
to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. PO12- Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation
and ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest
context of technological change.

Program specific outcomes (PSOs)

1. PSO1- Competence in analysis and design of analog and digital
system using hardware and software tools.
2. PSO2- Understand, analyse the present and future generations of
wireless communication technologies.

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

ECE graduates will

1. PEO 1- have adequate analytical capabilities and practical knowledge to
attend to the current challenging tasks and to absorb futuristic trends.
2. PEO 2- have adequate analytical capabilities and practical knowledge to
attend to the current challenging tasks and to absorb futuristic trends.
3. PEO 3- able to abreast with the latest hardware and software design
techniques and cutting-edge technologies.
4. PEO 4- able to enhance the knowledge and skills continually throughout
their career and to make them capable to adapt in diverse environments.
5. PEO 5- imbibe leadership qualities among the students to take up
challenging roles in their career by ensuring professional ethics with high
sense of social responsibility.

4
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
R-20 – Scheme of Instruction effective from the academic year 2020-2021
B. Tech (Electronics and Communications Engineering)

SEMESTER-I (First Year)

Scheme of Instruction (Hours/Week) No. of

Course
Course Title Lecture (L) Tutorial (T) Practical (P) Total Hours Credits
Code
MA 101 Mathematics-I 3 1 - 4 4
PY 102 Modern Physics 3 1 - 4 4
CS 103 Programming for Problem Solving 2 1 - 3 3
EC 104 Electronic Devices 3 1 - 4 4
ME 105 Workshop/ Manufacturing Practices - - 3 3 1.5
CS 106 Programming for Problem Solving Lab - - 3 3 1.5
CE 107 Environmental Sciences 4 - - 4 0
Total 18

Category CREDITS

Basic Science Course 11

Professional Core Course -PCC 07

Skill Oriented Course-SC 00

TOTAL CREDITS 18

5
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
R-20 – Scheme of Instruction effective from the academic year 2020-2021
B. Tech (Electronics and Communications Engineering)
SEMESTER-II (First Year)

Scheme of Instruction (Hours/Week)

Course
Course Title
Code Lecture (L) Tutorial (T) Practical (P) Total Hours No. of
Credits
MA 201 Mathematics-II 3 1 - 4
CY 202 Engineering Chemistry 3 1 - 4
EN 203 English 2 - - 2
EE 205 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 - 4
ME 205 Engineering Graphics and Design 2 - 3 3.5
EN 206 English Communication Lab - - 3 1.5
Total 19

Category CREDITS

Basic Science Course 11.5

Professional Core Course -PCC 7.5

Skill Oriented Course-SC 00

TOTAL CREDITS 19

• All courses - 40 marks (Internal) + 60 marks (Univ. Semester End)

• Audit Course – 100 marks (Internal) - Zero Credits
6
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
R-20 – Scheme of Instruction effective from the academic year 2020-2021
B. Tech (Electronics and Communications Engineering)

Semester III (Second Year)

Scheme of
Hours/Week
S. Course Category Evaluation Marks Total
No.
Credits
Code Course Title End Marks
L T P Internal
Sem
1 MA301B BSC Mathematics-III 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
2 EC302C PCC Network Theory 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
3 EC303C PCC Signals and Systems 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
4 EC304C PCC Electromagnetic Waves and 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Transmission Lines
5 EC305C PCC Digital Logic Design 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
6 EC306C PCC Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
7 EC307L PCC-Lab Basic Electrical Engineering lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
8 EC308L PCC-Lab Electronic Devices lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
9 EC309S SC Entrepreneurship and Design Thinking 2 0 0 2 100 -- 100
10 MC310A MC Constitution of India 2 0 0 0 100 -- 100
11 EC311L PCC-Lab Simulation Lab 0 0 2 1 100 --- 100
Total Credits 22 0 8 24 620 480 1100

Category CREDITS
Basic Science Course 03
Professional Core Course -PCC 19
Skill Oriented Course-SC 02
TOTAL CREDITS 24

7
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
R-20 – Scheme of Instruction effective from the academic year 2020-2021
B. Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
Semester IV (Second Year)
Scheme of
Categor Hours/Week
S. Course Evaluation Marks
No.
y Credits Total
Code Course Title End
L T P Internal Marks
Sem
1 EC401C ESC Linear Control Systems 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
2 EC402C PCC Probability theory and 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Stochastic Process
3 HS403C HSS Managerial Economics and Accountancy 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
4 EC404C PCC IC Applications 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
5 EC405C PCC Analog Communications 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
6 EC406L PCC-Lab Digital Logic Design lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
7 EC407L PCC-Lab Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
8 EC408L PCC-Lab IC Applications Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
9 EC409S SC Python Programming 1 0 2 2 100 --- 100
10 MC NSS/ NCC/ NSO Activities 0 0 0 - - - -
Total Credits 16 0 11 21.5 420 480 900

Category CREDITS
Professional Core Course -PCC 13.5
Engineering Science course—ESC 03
Humanities and Social sciences-HSS 03
Skill Oriented Course-SC 02
TOTAL CREDITS 21.5

All undergraduate students shall register for NCC/NSS/NSO activities in First semester of B.Tech. A student will be required to participate in an
activity for two hours in a week during second and third semesters i.e., 60 hours. Grade shall be awarded as Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory in the
mark sheet on the basis of participation, attendance, performance and behaviour. If a student gets an unsatisfactory Grade, he/she shall repeat the
above activity in the subsequent years, in order to complete the degree requirements.

8
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION –CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B. Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
R-20 – Program Effective for the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2020-21

Semester V (Third Year)

Scheme of
Hours/Week
S. Course Category Evaluation Marks
No.
Credits Total
Code Course Title End
L T P Internal Marks
Sem
1 EC501C PCC Computer Organization & Architecture 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
2 EC502C PCC Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
3 EC503C PCC Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
4 EC504C PCC Antennas and Wave Propagation 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
5 EC505C PCC Digital Communications 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
6 EC506L PCC-Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
Lab
7 EC507L PCC-Lab Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 2 1 40 60 100
Analog and Digital Communications
8 EC508L PCC-Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
Lab
9 EC509S SOC Web Design and Development 1 0 2 2 100 --- 100
10 EC510A MC Universal Human Values 2 0 0 0 100 ---- 100
Community Service Project (CSP) during second year (To be
0 0 0 1.5 100 ----- 100
evaluated during V semester) with duration greater than 45 hours.
Total Credits 22.5 620 480 1100

L – Lecturer hours; Tut. – Tutorials; P/D – Practical or Drawing; T – Total

Category CREDITS
Professional Core Course -PCC 19
Skill Oriented Course-SOC-Internal evaluation for 100 Marks 2
Summer Internship 1.5
TOTAL CREDITS 22.5

9
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION –CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
R-20 – Program Effective for the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2020-21

Semester VI (Third Year)

S.NO Course Category Hours/Week Credits Scheme of
Code Course Title Evaluation Marks Total
L T P Internal End Sem Marks
1 EC601C PCC Microwave Engineering 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
2 EC602C PCC Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
3 EC603C PEC Professional Elective-I 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
4 EC604C PEC Professional Elective-II 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
5 EC605C OEC Open Elective-1(Through MOOCS) 3 0 0 3 100 0 100
6 EC606C OEC Open Elective-2(Through MOOCS) 3 0 0 3 100 0 100
7 EC607L PCC-Lab Microwave Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
8 EC608L PCC-Lab Computer Networks Lab 0 0 3 1.5 40 60 100
9 EC609S SOC Internet of Things and Applications 2 0 0 2 100 -- 100
10 EC610MC MC Professional Ethics in Engineering. 2 0 0 0 100 -- 100
Summer Internship with duration of 4 to 6 weeks (To be evaluated during VII 0 0 0
semester)
Total Credits 23 640 360 1000

L – Lecturer hours; Tut. – Tutorials; P/D – Practical or Drawing; T - Total

Category CREDITS
Professional Core Course -PCC 9
Professional Elective- PEC 6
Open Elective Course/Job Oriented elective-OEC 6
Skill Oriented Course-SOC -Internal evaluation for 100 Marks 2
TOTAL CREDITS 23

10
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION –CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
R-20 – Program Effective for the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2020-21
Semester VII (Fourth Year)
Scheme of
Hours/Week Total
S.NO Code Category Course Title Credits Evaluation Marks
Marks
L T P Internal End Sem
1 EC701C PCC Digital Image and Video Processing 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
2 EC702C PEC Professional Elective-III 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
3 EC703C PEC Professional Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
4 EC704C PEC Professional Elective-V 3 0 0 3 40 60 100
5 EC705C OEC Open Elective-III (Through MOOCS) 3 0 0 3 100 0 100
6 EC706C OEC Open Elective-IV (Through MOOCS) 3 0 0 3 100 0 100
7 EC707S SOC Machine Learning 2 0 0 2 100 0 100
8 EC708I Summer Internship (4 to 6 Weeks) 3 100 0 100
completed during VI Semester
TOTAL CREDITS 23 560 240 800

L – Lecturer hours; Tut. – Tutorials; P/D – Practical or Drawing; T - Total

Category CREDITS
Professional Core Course -PCC 3
Professional Elective- PEC 9
Open Elective Course/Job Oriented elective-OEC 6
Skill Oriented Course-SOC-Internal evaluation for 100 Marks 2
Industrial/Research Internship 3
TOTAL CREDITS 23

11
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION –CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B. Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
R-20 – Program Effective for the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2020-21
Semester VIII (Fourth Year)
Scheme of
Course Hours/Week
S.NO Category Course Title Credits Evaluation Marks Total
Code
L T P Internal End Sem Marks
1 Major Project-Work and Internship 0 0 24 12 40 60 100
Project
Total Credits 12 100

L – Lecturer hours; Tut. – Tutorials; P/D – Practical or Drawing; T – Total

S. No. Semester Credits

1. I 18
2. II 19
3. III 23
4. IV 22.5
5. V 22.5
6. VI 23
7. VII 23
8. VIII 12
TOTAL CREDITS 163

12
 B.Tech. (R20)
Program Electives

I II III IV V

(VI-Semester) (VI-Semester) (VII-Semester) (VII-Semester) (VII-Semester)

Neural Networks and Satellite

CMOS VLSI Design Cyber Security Embedded System Design
Fuzzy Logic Communication

Fiber Optic
Information Theory and Real Time Operating
Nano Electronics Radar Engineering Communication
Coding Systems

Optimization Sensors and Transducers Wireless FPGA Based System

Testing and Testability
Techniques Communication Design

Digital Signal
Hardware-Software Bio-Medical MEMS
Electronic Instrumentation Processors &
Co-design Instrumentation
Architectures

13
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: TIRUPATI-517502

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

R-20 – Scheme of Instructions effective from the academic year 2020-2021

Courses offered for Honors degree

S.No. Course Code Course Title Prerequisite if any Contact Hours per week Credits

L T
Any 4(Four)From the Following 6(Six) Courses
1 ECHN01 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Digital Signal Processing 3 1 4

2 ECHN02 Antennas and Radiating Systems Antenna and Wave Propagation 3 1 4

3 ECHN03 Wireless and Mobile Communications Digital Communications 3 1 4

4 ECHN04 Voice and Data Networks NIL 3 1 4

5 ECHN05 Advanced Communication Networks Computer Networks 3 1 4

6 ECHN06 Pattern recognition and Machine Learning Digital Image & Video Processing 3 1 4

Two courses to be pursued through MOOCS with duration of 8 weeks each.

7 ECHN07 Remote Sensing 2

8 ECHN08 Optical Networks 2
9 ECHNO9 Cloud Computing 2

Total Credits 20

14
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: TIRUPATI-517502

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

R-20 – Scheme of Instructions effective from the academic year 2020-2021

Courses offered for Minors in Electronics

S. No Course Code Course Title Prerequisite if any Contact Hours per week Credits
L T P
Any 4(Four)From the Following 6(Six) Courses
1. ECMN01 ( EC 104) Electronic Devices NIL 3 1 0 4
2. ECMN02 ( EC305C) Digital Logic Design NIL 3 1 0 4
3. ECMN03 ( EC306C ) Analog Circuits Electronic Devices 3 1 0 4
4 ECMN04( EC404C ) IC Applications Analog Circuits 3 1 0 4
5 ECMN05 Electronic Instrumentation Electronic Devices 3 1 0 4
( EC604C-Program Elective-II )
6 ECMN06 CMOS VLSI Design 1.Electronic Devices 3 1 0 4
( EC603C --Program Elective-I) 2.Analog Circuits
Two courses to be pursued through MOOCS with a duration of 8 weeks

7 ECMN07 Internet of Things and Applications 2

8 ECMN08 Sensors and Transducers 2
9 ECMN09 Micro-electromechanical Systems (MEMS) 2
10 ECMN10 Microprocessors and Micro Controllers 2
Total Credits 20

15
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: TIRUPATI-517502

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

R-20 – Scheme of Instructions effective from the academic year 2020-2021

Courses offered for Minors in Communications

S.No Course Code Course Title Prerequisite if any Contact Hours per Credits
Offered in Semester week
L T P
Any 4(Four)From the Following 7(Seven) Courses

1. ECMN11 Signals & Systems 1.Mathematics-I 3 1 0 4

(EC303C) 2.Mathematics-II
2. ECMN12 Probability theory & Stochastic Process 1.Mathematics-I 3 1 0 4
( EC402C ) 2.Mathematics-II
3. ECMN13 Analog Communications NIL 3 1 0 4
( EC405C)
4. ECMN14 Digital Communications 1. Signals & Systems 3 1 0 4
( EC505C ) 2. Probability theory &
Stochastic Process
5. ECMN15 Antenna Wave Propagation Electromagnetic Waves and 3 1 0 4
( EC504C ) Transmission Lines
6. ECMN16 Microwave Engineering Antenna Wave Propagation 3 1 0 4
( EC601C )
7. ECMN17 Computer Networks NIL 3 1 0 4
( EC602C )
8. ECMN18 Cyber Security NIL 3 1 0 4
( EC604C-
Program
Elective-II)

16
 SRI VENKATESWARA UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: TIRUPATI-517502

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

R-20 – Scheme of Instructions effective from the academic year 2020-2021

Two courses to be pursued through MOOCS with duration of 8 weeks

9. ECMN19 Satellite Communications 2

10. ECMN20 Fiber optic Communications 2

11. ECMN21 Mobile Communications 2

Total Credits 20

17
FIRST YEAR
SYLLABUS

18
 I Semester MA 101MATHEMATICS –I
(I Semester - Common for all branches)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I

Differential Equations: Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant
coefficients-particular integrals-homogeneous differential equations with variable coefficients-
method of parameters-simulation equations.

UNIT II

Laplace Transforms I: Laplace transforms of standard functions-inverse transforms-transforms of

derivatives and integrals-derivatives of transforms-integrals of transforms.

UNIT III

Laplace Transforms II: Transforms of periodic functions-convolution theorem-applications to

solution of ordinary differential equations.

UNIT IV

Calculus: Roll’s and Mean value theorems - Taylor’s and Maclaurins’s series-maxima and minima
for functions of two variables - Infinite series - Convergence Tests series of positive terms -
comparison, Ratio tests - Alternating series - Leibnitz’s rule - Absolute and conditional convergence.

UNIT V

Multiple Integrals: Curve tracing (both Cartesian and polar coordinate) - Evaluations of double and
Triple integrals-change of order of integrations-change of variables of integrations-simple
applications to areas and volumes.

Text/Reference Books:

1. B S Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 40th Edition, Khanna Publications, 2007.

2. M K Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics, National Publishing Company, Chennai.
3. B V Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 6th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
4. Bali and Iyengar, Engineering Mathematics, 6th Edition, Laxmi Publications, 2006.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Analyze differential equations and solve them and also apply differential equations to
engineering problems.
2. Use transformation to convert one type into another type presumably easier to solve, and also
use shift theorems to compute the Laplace transform, inverse Laplace transform and the
solutions of second order, linear equations with constant coefficients.

19
 3. Solve an initial value problem for an nth order ordinary differential equation using the
Laplace transform, and also expand functions as power series using Maclaurin’s and Talor’s
series
4. Optimize the problems related to or, computer science, probability and statistics and also
draw an approximate shape by the study of some of its important characteristics such as
symmetry, tangents, regions enclosing curve tracing method to find length, area, volume.
5. Use multiple integral in evaluating area and volume of any region bounded by the given
curves.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 1 2 2 3 - - -
CO2 1 3 3 1 - 1 1 1 2 1 3 - - -
CO3 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 1 2 2 3 - - -
CO4 1 2 2 1 - 1 2 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 1 2 1 2 - 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

20
 I & II Semesters CY 101/ CY 202 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
(I Semester - CY 101 for Civil & Mechanical Engineering)
(II Semester -CY 202 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I

Atomic and molecular structure (12 lectures)

Postulates of quantum chemistry. Schrodinger equation. Particle in a box solution, Molecular orbitals
of diatomic molecules and plots of the multicenter orbitals, Equations for atomic and molecular
orbitals, Energy level diagrams of diatomics, Pi-molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene. Band
structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures

UNIT II

Spectroscopic techniques and applications

Principles of spectroscopy and selection rules. Electronic spectroscopy. Fluorescence and its
applications in medicine. Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules.
Applications. Nuclearmagnetic resonance and magnetic resonance imaging, surface characterization
techniques.

UNIT III

Chemical equilibria, Intermolecular forces and potential energy surfaces

Use of free energy in Thermodynamic functions: energy, entropy and free energy. Estimations of
entropy and free energies. Free energy and emf. Cellpotentials, the Nernst equation and applications.
Use of free energy considerations in metallurgy through Ellingham diagram. Equations of state of
real gases and critical phenomenon.

UNIT IV

Periodic properties
Effective nuclear charge, penetration of orbitals, variations of s, p, d and f orbital energies of atoms
in the periodic table, electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies, electron
affinity and electronegativity, polarizability, oxidation states, coordination numbers and geometries,
hard soft acids and bases, molecular
geometries, Born- Haber cycle, The use of reduction potentials, Properties of ionic and covalent
compounds.

UNIT V

Stereochemistry, Organic reactions and synthesis of a drug molecule

Representations of 3 dimensional structures, structural isomers and stereoisomers, configurations
and symmetry and chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, optical activity, absolute configurations and
conformational analysis. Introduction to reactions involving substitution, addition, elimination,
oxidation, reduction, cyclization and ring openings Synthesis of a commonly used drug molecule.

21
 Reference/Textbooks:

1. University chemistry, by B. H. Mahan

2. Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M. J. Sienko and R. A. Plane
3. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, by C. N. Banwell
4. Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book), by B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin and M. S.
Krishnan
5. Physical Chemistry by P. W. Atkins
6. Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore, 5th Ed.
7. Principles of physical chemistry, Puri, Sharma and Pattania

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Analyze microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals and intermolecular
Forces.
2. Rationalize bulk properties and processes using thermodynamic considerations.
3. Distinguish the ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different Molecular
energy levels in various spectroscopic techniques.
4. Rationalize periodic properties such as ionization potential, electronegativity, oxidation states
and electronegativity, and also list major chemical reactions that are used in the synthesis of
molecules.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO2 1 1 3 - - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO3 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 1 - - - - -

CO4 1 1 2 2 2 - 1 2 1 1 - - - -

22
 I Semester CH 102 CHEMISTRY FOR CHEMICAL ENGINEERING – I
(I Semester –For Chemical Engineering)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I

Introduction to quantum theory for chemical systems:

Schrodinger equation, Applications to Hydrogen atom, Atomic orbitals, many electron atoms
UNIT II

Chemical bonding in molecules:

MO theory, Structure, bonding and energy levels of bonding and shapes of many atom molecules,
Coordination Chemistry, Electronic spectra and magnetic properties of complexes with relevance to
bio-inorganic chemistry, organ metallic chemistry

UNIT III

Introduction to Stereochemistry:
Stereo descriptors – R, S, E, Z. Enantiomers and Diastereomers. Racemates and their resolution.
Conformations of cyclic and acyclic systems.

UNIT IV

Reactivity of organic molecules:

Factors influencing acidity, basicity, and nucleophilicity of molecules, kinetic vs. thermodynamic
control of reactions

UNIT V

Strategies for synthesis of organic compounds:

Reactive intermediates substitution, elimination, rearrangement, kinetic and thermodynamic aspects,
role of solvents.

Text / Reference Books:

1. Physical Chemistry: G.W.Castellan, Narosa
2. Organic Chemistry: Finar; I.L. — Vol — I & II, Pearson Education
3. Organic Chemistry: Morrison & Boyd; PHI/Pearson Education.
4. Physical Chemistry: P. W. Atkins: Oxford.
5. A Text book of Physical Chemistry: K. L. Kapoor: Macmillan
6. A guide Book to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry: Peter Sykes
7. Organic Chemistry: Loudon: Oxford

23
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Appreciate quantum theory of chemical systems

2. Appreciate aliphatic chemistry and stereochemistry
3. Write simple mechanisms.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
- -
CO2 1 1 3 - - - - - 1 - - -
- -
CO3 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 1 - - -
- -

24
 I & II Semester EN 203 ENGLISH
(I Semester - EN 103 for ChE, CE & ME)
(II Semester - EN 203 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
Instruction: 2(L) Credits: 2 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
Vocabulary Building
The concept of Word Formation- Root words from foreign languages and their use in English-
Acquaintance with prefixes and suffixes from foreign languages in English form derivatives-
Synonyms, antonyms, and standard abbreviations.

UNIT II
Basic Writing Skills
Sentence Structures – Use of phrases and clauses in sentences –Importance of proper punctuation -
Creating coherence – Organizing principles of paragraphs in documents -Techniques for writing
precisely

UNIT III
Identifying Common Errors in Writing
Subject-verb agreement -Noun-pronoun agreement -Misplaced modifiers -Article -Prepositions -
Redundancies -Clichés

UNIT IV
Nature and Style of sensible Writing
Describing - Defining - Classifying –Providingexamples or evidence –Writingintroductionand
conclusion

UNIT V
Writing Practices
Comprehension - Précis Writing –EssayWriting

Reference/Textbooks:
1. Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
2. Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
3. On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
4. Study Writing. LizHamp- Lyonsand Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006.
5. Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumarand Pushpalata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
6. Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Learn the elements of grammar and composition, literary texts such as Short stories and
prose passages of English Language.
2. Maintain linguistic competence through training in vocabulary, sentence structures and
pronunciation.
3. Develop communication skills by cultivating the habit of reading comprehension passages,
language skills like listening, speaking, reading and writing.

25
 4. Make use of self-instructed learner friendly modes of language learning through
competence.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - - - - - - 2 - 3 2 2 3 - -

CO2 - - - - 3 - - - 2 - - 1 - -

CO3 - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 2 - -

CO4 - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 3 - -

26
 I Semester EE104 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGG
(I Semester – for ChE, CE & ME)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

Unit-I
Electric DC Circuits: Kirchhoff’s Voltage & Current laws, Superposition Theorem, Star – Delta
Transformations. AC Circuits: Complex representation of Impedance, Phasor diagrams, Power &
Power Factor, Solution of Single Phase Series & Parallel Circuits. Solution of Three Phase circuits
and Measurement of Power in Three Phase circuits.

Unit-II
Single Phase Transformers: Principle of Operation of a Single phase Transformer, EMF equation,
regulation and Efficiency of a single phase transformer. DC Machines: Principle of Operation,
Classification, EMF and Torque equations, Characteristics of Generators and Motors

UNIT-III
Three Phase Induction Motor: Principle of Rotating Magnetic Field, Principle of Operation of 3-φ
I.M., Torque-Speed Characteristics of 3-φ I.M.

UNIT-IV
P-N junction operation, diode applications, Zener diode as regulator. Transistor and applications:
Introduction to transistors, BJT Characteristics, biasing and applications

UNIT-V
Integrated Circuits: Operational amplifiers, Applications: adder, subtractor, Integrator and
Differentiator. Digital Circuits: logic gates, Combinational Logic circuits, Flip-Flops, counters and
shift registers, Laboratory measuring instruments: digital multi-meters and Cathode Ray
Oscilloscopes (CRO’s).

Textbooks:
1. Electrical Technology by Edward Hughes
2. Basic Electrical Engineering by Nagrath and Kothari

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Understand the basic concepts of D.C. single phase and 3- phase supply and circuits and
solve basic electrical circuit problems
2. Understand the basic concepts of transformers and motors used as various industrial drives.
3. Understand the concept of power factor improvement for industrial installations and
concepts of most economical power factor.
4. Understand the operation and characteristics of diodes, transistors, integrated circuits and
digital circuits.

27
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 - -

CO2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - - 1 1 - -

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 - - -

CO4 2 3 2 1 3 1 - - 2 2 3 2 3 2

28
 I & II Semesters
ME 105 / ME 205ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND DESIGN
(I Semester - ME105 for ChE, CE & ME)
(II Semester - ME205 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
Instruction: 2(L) +3 (Drg) /week Credits: 3.5 Assessment: 40 + 60

Unit I
Introduction to Engineering Drawing
Principles of Engineering Graphics and their significance, usage of Drawing instruments, lettering,
Conic sections including the Rectangular Hyperbola (General method only);Cycloid,Epi-cycloid,
Hypo-cycloid and Involutes.

Unit II
Scales- Scales– construction of Plain &Diagonal Scales.
Projections of points, lines - Projections of Points and lines inclined to both planes, including traces;
Question Paper
Modular – 4 questions from Units I t0 IV, 15 marks each

Unit III
Projections of planes
Projections of planes (Regular surfaces only) inclined Planes-Auxiliary Planes
Projections of Regular Solids (Simple solids – cylinder, cone, prism & pyramid) those inclined
to both the Planes-Auxiliary Views

Unit IV
Isometric Projections& Orthographic projections
Principles of Orthographic Projections-Conventions Draw simple objects, dimensioning and
scale. Principles of Isometric projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions;
Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric
Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa, Conventions.

Unit V
Introduction to CAD
CAD workstation and peripherals, Demonstrating knowledge of the theory of CAD software
[such as: The Menu System, Toolbars Standard, Object Properties, Draw, Modify and
Dimension, Drawing Area (Background, Crosshairs, Coordinate System), Dialog boxes and
windows, Shortcut menus (Button Bars), The Command Line (where applicable), The Status
Bar, Different methods of zoom used in CAD, Select and erase objects.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. &Ingle P.R., (2014), Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing
House.
2. Shah, M. B & Rana B.C. (2008), Engineering Drawing and Computer Graphics, Pearson
Education.
3. Agrawal B. & Agrawal C.M. (2012) Engineering Graphics, TMH Publication.

29
 4. Narayana, K.L. &P Kannaiah(2008),Text book on Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers.
5. Corresponding set of) CAD Software Theory and User Manuals

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

1. Make a distinction between first angle projection and third angle projection of drawing.
2. Draw hyperbola, parabola, involutes and cycloidal curves.
3. Draw sections of solids including cylinders, cones, prisms and pyramids.
4. Draw orthographic projections of lines, planes, solids and sections of solids.
.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO2 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -

CO4 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - -

30
 I & II Semesters EN 106 / EN 206 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION LAB
(I Semester - EN 106 for ChE, CE & ME)
(II Semester - EN206 for EEE, ECE & CSE)

Instruction: 0(L) +3(Lab) /week Credits: 1.5 Assessment: 40 + 60

Listening Comprehension -Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm -Common Everyday

Situations: Conversations and Dialogues -Communication at Workplace -Interviews -Formal
Presentations

Reference/Text Books:
1. Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
2. Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
3. On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
4. Study Writing. LizHamp– Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge Univ. Press. 2006
5. Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushpalata. Oxford Univ. Press.2011
6. Exercises in Spoken English. PartsI-III.CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford Univ. Press

Course Outcomes:

The student will acquire basic proficiency in English including reading and listening comprehension,
writing and speaking skills.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - - - - - - - - 1 3 2 3 - -

31
 I Semester PY 102 MODERN PHYSICS
(For I Semester –EEE, ECE & CSE)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
Quantum Mechanics : Wave – Particle duality – de Broglie Concept of Matter Waves – Properties
of Matter Waves – Davison and Germer Experiment – G.P. Thomson Experiment – Heisenberg’s
Uncertainty Principle – Schrödinger’s Time Independent and Time Dependent Wave equation –
Significance of Wave Function – Electron in an Infinite Square Potential Well – Probability Densities
and Energy Levels.

UNIT II
Band Theory of Solids : Classical Free Electron Theory of Metals – Success and Failures – Quantum
Free Electron Theory – Fermi Factor – Electron in Periodic Potential – Bloch Theorem – Kronig –
Penney Model – Distinction between Metals , Insulators and semiconductors- Energy Band
Structures.

UNIT III
Semiconductors – Introduction- Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors – Density of states – Carrier
Concentrations at Equilibrium – Hall Effect. PN Junction Diode – Energy Band Diagram – Forward
and Reverse Bias- Current – Voltage characteristics – Applications- Zener Diode – Light Emitting
Diode- Photo diode -Solar Cell – Semiconductor Laser.

UNIT IV
Electromagnetism and magnetic properties of Materials:
Laws of Electro statistics- Electric Current- Laws of Magnetism- Ampere`s, Faraday`s laws-
Maxwell Equations – Polarization – Permeability and dielectric constant- Polar and non-polar
Dielectrics, Clausius-Mossotti equation, Applications of Dielectrics.
Magnetization – Permeability and Susceptibility- Classification of Magnetic Materials,
Ferromagnetism-Magnetic Domains and hysteresis, Applications of ferromagnetic materials.

UNIT V
Nanophysics and Nanotechnology: Introduction to Nanomaterials –Properties: Optical Properties
– Quantum Confinement – Electrical properties. Synthesis of Nanomaterials: Ball milling, Arc
deposition method – Chemical Vapour Deposition-Pulsed laser deposition. Characteristics of C60
(Zero dimensional), Carbon Nanotubes (One Dimensional) and Graphene(Two Dimensional).
Applications of Nanomaterials.

Text Books / Reference Books:

1. R.K. Gaur and S.L. Gupta ``Engineering Physics” Sultan and Chand Pub., New Delhi
2. S.P. Basava Raju `` A Detailed Text Book of Engineering Physics” Sole Distributors,
Subhash Stores Book Corner, Bangalore
3. Hitendra K. Malik and A.K. Singh ``Engineering Physics” Tata MC Graw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
4. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar ``A Textbook of Engineering Physics`` S.Chand and
Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

32
 5. John Allison, ``Electronic Engineering Materials and Devices” Tata Mc Graw Hill
Publications.
6. B. L Theraja, “Modern physics”, S. Chand & Company.
7. V. Raghavan “Material Science”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
8. M.S. Ramachandra Rao and Shubra Singh, `Nanoscience and Nanotechnology` Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Develop appropriate competence and working knowledge of laws of modern Physics in

understanding advanced technical engineering courses and also understand the quantum
mechanics and ultimately the quantum behavior of charged particles when they are in motion.
2. Identify and apply appropriate analytical and mathematical tools of Physics in solving
Engineering problems and also apply knowledge of band theory in the area of electronics and
understanding the basic electron transportation phenomenon in microdevices.
3. Understand the principles in electrostatics and electromagnetics and magnetic properties of
materials, size depended properties of nano-dimensional materials and their effective
utilization in making nano- and micro-devices for further microminiaturization of electronic
devices.
4. Think and participate deeply, creatively, and analytically in emerging areas of engineering
technology, analyze the basics of instrumentation, design of laboratory techniques,
measurement, data acquisition, interpretation, and analysis and also provide multidisciplinary
experiences throughout the curriculum.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 - -

CO2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - - 1 - 1 - -

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 - - -

CO4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 - -

33
 I & II Semesters CS 103 / CS203 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING
(I Semester –CS 103 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
(II Semester –CS 203 for ChE, CE & ME)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60
Course Objectives:
1. To acquire problem solving skills
2. To be able to develop flowcharts and algorithms for the given problem
3. To learn how to write modular programs in C
4. To enable to use arrays, pointers, strings and structures in solving problems.
5. To explain the difference between object-oriented programming and procedural
programming.
6. To understand principles of object-oriented programming.
UNIT-I
Problem Solving: Problem solving techniques, Computer as a problem-solving tool, Programming
Languages – Machine Language, Assembly Language, Low and High-Level Languages, Procedural
and Object-Oriented Languages. Algorithm definition, Features, Criteria, Flowchart definition, Basic
symbols, Sample flowcharts, Problem solving aspects, Efficiency of algorithms.
Basics of C: Structure of a C program, C tokens, Keywords, Identifiers, Basic data types and sizes,
Constants, Variables, Operators in C, Operator Precedence and Associativity, Expressions, Type
conversions, Basic input/output statement, Sample programs.
UNIT-II
Conditional Statements: Selection statements, Decision making within a program, Simple if
statement, if-else statement, Nested if-else, if-else ladder and switch-case. Iterative statements:
while-loop, do-while loop, for loop, Nested loops, Infinite loops, goto, break and continue
statements, Sample programs.
Functions: Introduction to modular programming and functions, Basics, Standard Library of C
functions, Prototype of a function, Parameter passing, User defined functions, Recursive functions,
passing arguments to a function: Call by reference, Call by value, Storage Classes in a single source
file, Scope rules, Header files, C Pre-processor.
UNIT-III
Arrays: Introduction to arrays, Definition, Declaration, Storing elements, Accessing elements, One
dimensional arrays: Array manipulation; Searching, Insertion, Deletion of an element from an array,
Two dimensional arrays, Addition/Multiplication of two matrices, Transpose of a square matrix,
Passing array to functions, String fundamentals, String manipulations, Standard library string
functions.
Pointers: Definition of pointer, pointer type declaration, pointer assignment, pointer initialization,
Pointer arithmetic, Functions and Pointers, Dangling memory, Character pointers and functions,
Pointers to pointers, Arrays and Pointers, Pointer arrays, Pointers and structures, Dynamic memory
management functions.
UNIT-IV
Structures: Structures declaration, Structure variables, Initialization of structures, accessing
structures, Nested structures, Arrays of structures, Structures containing arrays, Structures and
functions, Pointers to structures, Self-referential structures, Unions, Typedef, Bit-fields.
File Processing: Concept of Files, Text files and binary files, File opening in various modes and
closing of a file, reading from a file, Writing onto a file.

34
 UNIT V
Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming (OOP): Need for OOP, Principles of OOP, Basics of
C++ Programming, Operator Overloading, Function Overloading, Inheritance: Derived classes,
Protected access specifier, Derived class constructors, Overriding member functions, Class
hierarchies, Public and Private inheritance, Multiple inheritance.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, student will be able to

1. Develop and test programs in C and correct syntax and logical errors.
2. Implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion, and decompose a problem into
functions and synthesize a complete program.
3. Use arrays, pointers, strings and structures to formulate algorithms and programs and also
use file to perform read and write operations.
4. Handle programming assignments based on class, abstraction, encapsulation, overloading
and inheritance.

Text Books
1. Ashok N Kamthane, Amit Ashok Kamthane, Programming in C, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2019.
2. Scheldt H, C: The Complete Reference, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.
3. R.G. Dromey, How to solve it by Computer, Pearson Education, 2019.
4. Hanly J R & Koffman E.B, “Problem Solving and Program design in C”, Pearson Education,
2019.
5. Herbert Schildt, The Complete Reference C++, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill.

Reference Books

1. C Programming-A Problem Solving Approach, Forouzan, Gilberg, Cengage.

2. Programming with C, Bichkar, Universities Press.
3. Programming in C, Reema Thareja, OXFORD.
4. C by Example, Noel Kalicharan, Cambridge.
5. The C++ Programming Language, Bjarne Stroustrup, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education.
6. Problem solving with C++: The Object of Programming, 9th Edition, Walter Savitch, Pearson
Education.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 2 2 1 - 3 - 2 2 - - - -

CO2 2 1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - -

CO3 2 3 1 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - -

CO4 2 3 2 1 1 - 2 - - - - - - -

35
 I & II Semesters CE 104 / CE 204 ENGINEERING MECHANICS
(I Semester –CE 104 for EEE)
(II Semester –CE 204 for CE & ME)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
STATICS : Basic concepts – System of force, Concurrent and non-concurrent coplanar and non-
coplanar forces – Resultant – Moment of force and its application – Couples and resultant of force
systems – Equilibrium of systems of forces – Free body diagrams, Equations of equilibrium of
coplanar systems and spatial systems.

UNIT II
Analysis of plane trusses: Types of supports – Types of trusses – Analysis of trusses using method
of joints and method of sections.

UNIT III
CENTRE OF GRAVITY AND MOMENTS OF INERTIA: Theory of Pappus – Centroids of
composite figures – Areas of gravity of bodies – Moment of inertia – Parallel and perpendicular axis
theorems – Moments of inertia of composite areas (rolled and built up sections) – Radius of gyration
of areas.

UNIT IV
SIMPLE STRESES AND STRAINS : Elasticity and plasticity – Types of stresses and strains –
Hooke’s law – Stress-strain diagram for mild steel – Working stress – Factor of safety.
Lateral strain – Poisson’s ratio and volumetric strain – Elastic moduli and relationship between
elastic constants – Bars of varying section – Composite bars – Temperature stresses.

UNIT V
STRAIN ENERGY: Gradual, sudden and impact loading – Endurance limit principles of virtual
work and its applications.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Ghose D.N. – Applied Mechanics and Strength of Materials.

2. Timoshenko & Young – Engineering Mechanics.
3. Junarkar SB – Mechanics of Structures – Vol. I.
4. Junarkar SB – Elements of Applied Mechanics.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, student will be able to

1. Apply the basic knowledge of force system.

2. Know the types of supports occur in civil engineering structures
3. Know the geometrical properties of different cross sections.
4. Understand different types of stresses and strains, elastic constants, and also understand the
behavior of different internal forces under different types of loading.

36
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4

37
 I Semester EC 104 ELECTRONIC DEVICES
(I Semester - for ECE only)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60
UNIT I
Semiconductor Materials: Atomic structure, Electrons in periodic Lattices, Classifying Materials:
Semiconductors, conductors and insulators, Semiconductor material groups, Covalent bonding,
Energy Bandgaps, Energy bands in intrinsic and extrinsic silicon /Germanium, Density of Impurity
States, Electrical Conductivity and Mobility, , Electronic Properties of N-type and P-type
semiconductors, Carrier transport: diffusion current, drift current, mobility and resistivity; sheet
resistance, design of resistors. Generation and recombination of carriers; Poisson and continuity
equation, P-N junction characteristics, I-V Characteristics, and small signal switching models, Diode
resistances and diode capacitances.

UNIT II
Diode models, Avalanche breakdown, Zener diode, Schottky diode, Tunnel diode, Varactor diode
and their applications, Testing a diode.
Rectifiers: Diode equivalent circuits, Analysis of diode circuits, Characteristics and comparison of
Half-wave, Full-wave and Bridge rectifiers, Analysis of filters (C, L, LC, and CLC) used with Full-
wave rectifiers, line regulation and load regulation.

UNIT III
Bipolar Junction Transistors: Bipolar Junction Transistor action, PNP and NPN transistors, CB, CE,
and CC configurations and their I-V characteristics, Analytical expressions for transistor
characteristics, Typical junction voltages and maximum ratings. Determination of h-parameters from
BJT characteristics, Ebers-Moll Model, Multi Emitter transistor.

UNIT IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor Biasing: Operating point, stabilization, thermal runaway.
Field Effect Transistors: Characteristics and parameters of JFET, Pinch off and saturation regions,
MOS capacitor, Depletion and Enhancement type of MOSFET, I-V characteristics, and small signal
models of MOS transistor, UJT and its I-V characteristics, Metal Semiconductor FET, FET biasing
schemes.

UNIT V
Optoelectronic Devices: Principle of operation and characteristics of LED. LCD, LDR,
Photoconductor, Photodiode, Phototransistor, Solar cell, PIN photodiode, Charge-Coupled Devices,
APD (avalanche photodiode) and their applications.
Power Semiconductor Devices: Device structure, equivalent circuit and characteristics of PNPN
Diode, SCR, DIAC and TRIAC.

Text /Reference Books:

1. Ben G. Steetman and Sanjay Kumar Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition,
Pearson Publishers, 2015.
2. Jacob Millman, Christos Halkias, Chetan D Parikh, “Integrated Electronics: Analog and
Digital Circuits and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2011.

38
 3. Allen Mottershead, “Electronic Devices and Circuits: An Introduction”, PHI Learning, 2011.
4. D. Neamen , D. Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices", McGraw-Hill Education.
5. S. M. Sze and K. N. Kwok, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices,” 3rd edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2006.
6. C.T. Sah, “Fundamentals of solid-state electronics,” World Scientific Publishing Co. Inc,
1991.
7. Y. Tsividis and M. Colin, “Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor,” Oxford
University Press, 2011.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, student will be able to

1. Understand the principles of semiconductor physics of the intrinsic, p and n type materials
and also the characteristics of the diode and some special function diodes and their application
in electronic circuits.
2. Use mathematics to analyze electronic devices typical of those in switching and rectifier
circuits.
3. Understand and utilize the mathematical models of semiconductor junctions and transistors
for circuits and systems.
4. Understand the characteristics of the transistors and opto-electronic devices and their
application in electronic circuits and also apply thyristors in power switching and control
circuits

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO4 - - - 1 - - 1 - - 1 1 - - -

39
 I Semester MA 104 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS
(I Semester - for CSE only)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
Probability: Introduction, Axiomatic approach, Conditional probability, Baye's theorem, Stochastic
process, Random variables, Discrete and Continuous distributions, Expectation, Variance, moments,
Moments generating functions.

UNIT II
Distributions - Binomial, Poisson, Normal, Uniform, Exponential and Gamma. Properties and
applications.

UNIT III
Estimator-Estimation of parameters by Method of moments and maximum likelihood-Testing
of hypothesis-small sample tests-t-test, F-test and Chi-Square test.

UNIT IV
Correlation: Curve fitting by method of least squares-Linear, Quadratic and Exponential Fitting-
Correlation-rank correlation-Regression analysis-Multiple correlation.

UNIT V
Quality Control: Concept of quality of a manufactured product-Causes of variation-Principle of
Shewart Control charts-X-Chart, R-Chart, p-Chart, np-chart and C-Chart.

Text Books:

1. S P Gupta, Statistical Methods, 38th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons Educational
Publishers,2009.
2. Y K V Iyengar, et al, Probability and Statistics 2nd Edition S. Chand & Company Ltd,2010.
3. S C Gupta and V K Kapur, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, 3rd Edition, Sultan Chand&
Sons Educational Publishers.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - -

CO2 - 2 - 1 - 2 - - - - - - - -

CO3 - 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - - -

CO4 - 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - - -

40
 I & II Semesters ME 105 / ME 205 WORKSHOP/MANUFACTURING PRACTICE
(ME 105 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
(ME 205 for ChE, CE & ME)
Instruction: 0(L) +3 (lab)/week Credits: 1.5 Assessment: 40 + 60

Workshop Practice: Five practices among

1. Machine shop
2. Fitting shop
3. Carpentry
4. Electrical wiring
5. Welding shop
6. Casting
7. Smithy
8. Plastic moulding & Glass Cutting

Examinations could involve the actual fabrication of simple components, utilizing one or
More of the techniques covered above.

Detailed Contents:
1. Manufacturing Methods-casting, forming, machining, joining, advanced manufacturing
2. methods
3. CNC machining, Additive manufacturing
4. Fitting operations & power tools.
5. Electrical &Electronics
6. Carpentry
7. Plastic moulding. Glass cutting
8. Metal casting.
9. Welding (arc welding & gas welding), brazing

The above course content is learnt by online videos/ppt presentations.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S. K., Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and Publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
2. Kalpakjian S. and Steven S. Schmid Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”,
4thedition, PearsonEducationIndiaEdition,2002.
3. GowriP.Hariharanand A. SureshBabu, Manufacturing Technology–I” Pearson
Education,2008.
4. Roy A. Lindberg, Processes and Materials of Manufacture”,4thedition, Prentice Hall
India,1998.
5. RaoP.N., “ManufacturingTechnology”,Vol. I & II,TataMcGrawHillHouse, 2017.

41
 Laboratory Outcomes

1. Upon completion of this laboratory course, students will be able to fabricate components with
their own hands.
2. They will also get practical knowledge of the dimensional accuracies and dimensional
tolerances possible with different manufacturing processes.
3. By assembling different components, they will be able to produce small devices of their
interest.
4. Course Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, the students will gain knowledge of the
different manufacturing processes which are commonly employed in the industry to fabricate
components using different materials.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - -

CO2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - -

CO3 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - -

CO4 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - -

42
 I & II Sem CS 106/ CS206 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING LAB
(CS 106 for EEE, ECE & CSE)
(CS 206 for ChE, CE & ME)
Instruction: 0(L) +3 (Lab)) /week Credits: 1.5 Assessment: 40 + 60

Course Objectives:

1. To provide exposure to problem-solving through programming

2. To train the student on the concepts of the C- Programming language

The following programs shall be developed and executed in Programming Language C.

1. Programs on conditional control constructs.

2. Programs on iterative statements (while, do-while, for).
3. Programs on recursive procedures.
4. Programs on arrays, matrices (single and multi-dimensional arrays).
5. Programs using user defined functions, demonstrating parameter passing methods viz. call
by value and call by reference.
6. Programs using different library functions viz, ctype.h, stdio.h, stdlib.h, string.h, conio.h
and pre-processor directives.
7. Programs using pointers (int pointer, char pointer) and pointer arrays.
8. Programs on structures and unions.
9. Programs on file processing.
10. Programs on pointers to structures and self-referential structures.

Course Outcomes: After completion of this course the student would be able to

1. Develop the C code for the given algorithm.

2. Understand, debug and trance the execution of program written in C language.

Refence Books:

1. Scheldt H, C: The complete Reference, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2022.

2. Hanly J R & Koffman E.B, “Problem Solving and Program design in C”, Pearson Education,
2019.
3. R.G. Dromey, How to solve it by Computer, Pearson Education, 2019.
4. Behrouz A. Forouzan & Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structured Programming
Approach Using C, Third Edition, Cengage Learning.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 2 2 1 - 3 - 2 2 - - - -

CO2 2 1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - -

43
 II Semester MA 201 MATHEMATICS II
(II Semester - for all branches)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60
Unit I
Matrices: rank of a matrix-solution of system of linear equations-Eigen values, vectors –Canley-
Hamilton theorem-quadratic forms-diagonalization.

Unit II
Vector Calculus: Gradient, Divergence, Curl of a vector and related properties-line, surface,
volume integrals- Green’s, Stokes’s and Gauss Divergence theorems and its applications.

Unit III
Fourier Series: Fourier series-even and odd functions, periodic functions-half range sine and cosine
series-harmonic analysis.

Unit IV
Special Functions I: Gamma and Beta functions-series solutions of differential equations-ordinary
points.

Unit V
Special Functions II: Bessel function-recurrence formulae-generating function for Jn(X)-Lengender
polynomials-recurrence formulae-generating function for Pn(X) - Rodriguez’s formula -
orthogonality of Lengender polynomials.

Text/Reference Books:

1. B S Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 40th Edition, Khanna Publications, 2007.

2. M K Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics, National Publishing Company, Chennai.
3. B V Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 6th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
4. Bali and Iyengar, Engineering Mathematics, 6th Edition, Laxmi Publications, 2006.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Use ranks of matrices to decide whether the system of linear equations is consistent or not,
and also use Cayley Hamilton theorem to find inverses or powers of matrices.
2. Use eigen values and vectors to reduce quadratic forms to normal form, and also to analyze
motion problems from real lines to curves and surfaces in 3-d and use tools such as divergence
and curl of vector and gradient, directional derivatives that play significant roles in many
applications.
3. Use green’s theorem to evaluate line integrals along simple closed contours on the plane and
also use stokes’ theorem to give a physical interpretation of the curl of a vector field
4. Use the divergence theorem to give a physical interpretation of the divergence of a vector
field, and also find the Fourier series to represent a function as a series of constants times
sine and cosine functions of different frequencies in order to observe periodic phenomenon.
5. Evaluate certain improper integrals to make them simple with introduction of gamma and
beta functions, and also study certain special functions that arise in solving certain ordinary
differential equations to model many physical phenomena.

44
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 3 3 1 - 2 1 1 2 1 3 - -

CO2 3 1 3 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 3 - -

CO3 3 1 3 2 2 - 2 2 1 2 2 3 - -

CO4 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 3 - -

CO5 3 1 3 2 2 - 1 2 2 1 2 3 - -

45
 II Semester PY 202ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(II Semester - for ChE, CE& ME)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60
UNIT I
Wave Optics
Interference: Huygen`s Principle-Principle of Superposition-Interference of Light-Young`s double
slit experiment- -Newton’s Rings.
Diffraction: Fraunhofer Diffraction at a Single Slit and a Circular Aperture-Plane Diffraction grating
–Resolving Power-Rayleigh`s Criterion-Resolving power of Grating and Microscope.
Lasers : Introduction – Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission of Radiation – Population Inversion
– Types of Lasers – Ruby Laser – He-Ne Laser – Semiconductor Laser – Applications of Lasers.

UNIT II
Mechanics of Rigid Body
Rigid Body-Rotational Motion and Kinematics Relations-Kinetic Energy and Angular Momentum
of a Rotating Body-Equation of Motion of a Rigid body (Torque of a Rigid Body)-Combined
Translation and Rotational Motion of a Rigid Body- Body Rolling on an inclined Plane.
Mechanics of Continuous Media
Elasticity, Stress and Strain- Hook`s Law and Behaviour of Wire Under Load- Elastic Constants-
Relation Between Elastic Modulii-Types of Supports, Beams and Loads-Different types of Bending-
Cantilever with an End Load. Ultrasonic Waves - Sound Absorption and Reverberation -Sabine
Formula - Acoustics of Buildings.

UNIT III
Electromagnetism and magnetic properties of Materials
Laws of Electro statistics- Electric Current- Laws of Magnetism- Ampere`s, Faraday`s laws-
Maxwells Equations – Polarization - Permeability and dielectric constant- Polar and non-polar
Dielectrics, Clausius-Mossotti equation, Applications of Dielectrics.
Magnetization - Permeability and Susceptibility- Classification of Magnetic Materials,
Ferromagnetism-Magnetic Domains and Hesteresis, Applications of ferromagnetic materials.

UNIT IV
Quantum Mechanics
Wave – Particle duality – de Broglie Concept of Matter Waves – Properties of Matter Waves –
Davison and Germer Experiment – G.P. Thomson Experiment – Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle
– Schrödinger’s Time Independent and Time Dependent Wave equation – Significance of Wave
Function – Electron in an Infinite Square Potential Well – Probability Densities and Energy Levels.

UNIT V
Nano Physics and Nanotechnology
Introduction to Nanomaterials –Properties: Optical Properties – Quantum Confinement – Electrical
properties. Synthesis of Nanomaterials: Ball milling, Arc deposition method – Chemical Vapour
Deposition-Pulsed laser deposition. Characteristics of C60 (Zero dimensional), Carbon Nanotubes
(One Dimensional) and Graphene( Two Dimensional). Applications of Nanomaterials.

Text Books / Reference Books:

1. R.K. Gaur and S.L. Gupta ``Engineering Physics” Sultan and Chand Pub., New Delhi
2. S. L. Gupta and Sanjeev Gupta `Unified Physics` Vol. I Jai Prakash Nath& Co., Meerut.

46
 3. Hitendra K. Malik and A.K. Singh ``Engineering Physics” Tata MC Graw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
4. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar “A Textbook of Engineering Physics” S. Chand and
Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
5. B. L Theraja, “Modern physics”, S. Chand& Company.
6. V. Raghavan “Material Science”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
7. M.S. RamachandraRao and Shubra Singh, “Nanoscience and Nanotechnology” Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Develop appropriate competence and working knowledge of laws of modern Physics in

understanding advanced technical engineering course and also understand the quantum
mechanics and ultimately the quantum behavior of charged particles when they are in
motion.
2. Identify and apply appropriate analytical and mathematical tools of physics in solving
engineering problems, and also apply the basic principles of mechanics of rigid body and
continuous media and their applications unrest and the principles in electrostatics and
electromagnetics and magnetic properties of materials.
3. Understand size depended properties of nano-dimensional materials and their effective
utilization in making nano- and micro-devices for further microminiaturization of electronic
devices, and also think and participate deeply, creatively, and analytically in emerging areas
of engineering technology.
4. Learn the basics of instrumentation, design of laboratory techniques, measurement, data
acquisition, interpretation, and analysis, and also provide multidisciplinary experiences
throughout the curriculum.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 - -

CO2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - - 1 - 1 - -

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 - - -

CO4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 - -

47
 II Semester CY203CHEMISTRY FOR CHEMICAL ENGINEERING-II
(II Semester - For ChE only)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
Colloids: Classification of colloids; Size and shape; preparation of sols; Origin of charge in Colloidal
particles: Stability of Colloids: Kinetic. Optical & electrical Properties: Electro kinetic phenomena:
Electrical Double Layer; Ultracentrifuge and Molecular weight determination of Macromolecules.
Viscosity: Definition of viscosity of a liquid; Determination of Viscosity; Surface Tension:
Introduction: Origin of Surface Tension: Surface energy, Capillarity; Contact Angle; Measurement
of Surface Tension by Capillary rise method; Variation of Surface Tension of a liquid with
Temperature and Concentration.

UNIT II
Kinetic theory of gases: Van der Waals Equation of state, Maxwell distribution law, vapour-liquid
equilibrium, Colligative property. Adsorption: Introduction; Gibb's adsorption equation; Surface
Excess; Adsorption isotherms: Freundlich, Langmuir, BET adsorption equations: Surface Films:
Langmuir Balance: two-dimensional equation of state.

UNIT III
Introduction to quantum mechanics: Spectral shape pf Blackbody radiation, Planck's equation and
a concept of quanta, breakdown of the classical equipartition principle, basic postulates of quantum
mechanics, Hamiltonian function &Hamiltonian operator, important properties of a Hamiltonian
operator, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle.

UNIT IV
Common organic reactions and their mechanisms: Friedel-Crafts, Claisen Condensation,
Cannizaro, Aldolcondensation. Fischer-Troapsch synthesis, Birch reduction, pekins reaction, Riemer
Tiemer reaction Wolf Kishner Reductio and Grignard reaction;

UNIT V
Aminoacids: Classification; General methods of preparation and properties of amino acids,
polypeptide synthesis, General properties of proteins, colour tests, enzymes. Lipids, fats and steroids;
nucleic acid, DNA & RNA - generation and structure. Carbohydrate: Classification, Glucose and
fructose, Disaccharides: Sucrose, maltose.

Text / Reference Books:

1. Physical Chemistry: G.W.Castellan, Narosa

2. Organic Chemistry: Finar; I.L. — Vol — I & II, Pearson Education
3. Organic Chemistry: Morrison & Boyd; PHI/Pearson Education.
4. Physical Chemistry: P. W. Atkins: Oxford.
5. A Text book of Physical Chemistry: K. L. Kapoor: Macmillan
6. A guide Book to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry: Peter Sykes
7. Organic Chemistry: Loudon: Oxford

48
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Understand the theoretical principles underlying molecular structure, bonding and properties
2. Know the fundamental concepts of structure and function in organic reactions, the use of
Kinetics and thermodynamics to elucidate mechanisms of reactions
3. Predict reactivity patterns and propose reasonable mechanisms

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO2 1 1 3 - - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO3 1 2 2 2 - - - 2 1 - - - - -

49
 II Semester EE 204 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
(II Semester - For ECE only)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60
UNIT-I
Basic Circuit Concepts: Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), Classification of Circuit elements,
Voltage and Current sources, Source transformation Techniques– Kirchhoff's laws – Star-delta
transformation – Network reduction techniques - Mesh and Nodal Analysis for D.C. Circuits–
Concept of mutual inductance – Dot convention.

UNIT-II
Network Topology: Graph, tree, incidence matrix, and tie set and cut set matrices – Formulation of
equilibrium equations based on graph theory. Duality and dual circuits
A.C. Fundamentals: Periodic waveforms – Average and effective values of different waveforms -
Form factor and crest factor.

UNIT-III
A.C. Circuits: Phase and phase difference – Phasor notation – Concept of reactance, impedance,
susceptance and admittance – Power factor -Active and reactive power – Impedance Triangle-Power
triangle – Steady State analysis of single-phase A.C. circuits consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC
combinations (series and parallel) – Phasor diagrams. Mesh and Nodal Analysis for A.C. Circuits.

UNIT-IV
Resonance: Series and Parallel Resonance – Resonant frequency, Half power frequencies,
bandwidth and Quality Factor.
Locus diagrams: Current locus diagrams of RL and RC series circuits and two branch parallel
circuits.

UNIT-V
Three Phase Circuits: Advantages of three phase systems – Phase sequence – Balanced and
Unbalanced systems – Magnitude and phasor relationships between line and phase voltages and
currents in balanced star and delta circuits – Analysis of balanced and unbalanced three phase circuits
with star and delta connected loads, Measurement of three phase power – Two wattmeter method

Text Books:

1. Sudhakar and Shyammohan, Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis, 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill
2. Ravish R. Singh, Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
3. Abhijit Chakrabarti: Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis, 7th Revised Edition, Dhanpat
Rai & Co.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Explain the operation & Characteristic of DC machines.

CO2: Explain the operation & performance of transformer.
CO3: Calculate efficiency of various Induction motors.
CO4: Determine regulation by synchronous impedance method (OC test & SC test).

50
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO4 - - 2 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -

51
 II Semester EE 205 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
(II Semester - for EEE only)
Instruction: 3(L) +1(T) /week Credits: 4 Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT-I
Basic Circuit Concepts: Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), Classification of Circuit elements,
Voltage and Current sources, Source transformation Techniques– Kirchhoff's laws – Star-delta
transformation – Network reduction techniques - Mesh and Nodal Analysis for D.C. Circuits–
Concept of mutual inductance – Dot convention.

UNIT-II
Network Topology: Graph, tree, incidence matrix, and tie set and cut set matrices – Formulation of
equilibrium equations based on graph theory. Duality and dual circuits
A.C. Fundamentals: Periodic waveforms – Average and effective values of different waveforms -
Form factor and crest factor.

UNIT-III
A.C. Circuits: Phase and phase difference – Phasor notation – Concept of reactance, impedance,
susceptance and admittance – Power factor -Active and reactive power – Impedance Triangle-Power
triangle - Steady State analysis of single-phase A.C. circuits consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC
combinations (series and parallel) – Phasor diagrams. Mesh and Nodal Analysis for A.C. Circuits.

UNIT-IV
D.C. Machines: Construction of a D.C. Machine, D.C. Generator: Operation, Classification and
EMF equation. D.C. Motor: Operation, Back E.M.F, Types, and Applications.
Single Phase Transformers: Principle of Operation, Types, EMF equation.

UNIT-V
Three Phase Induction Motor: Production of Rotating Magnetic Field, Construction and operation
of 3-Phase Induction Motor.
Alternators: Construction and working of Alternators.

Text Books:

1. Sudhakar and Shyammohan, Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis, 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill
2. Ravish R. Singh, Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
3. Nagrath and Kothari,Basic Electrical Engineering, 4th Edition, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
4. D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

1. Understand and analyze basic electric and magnetic circuits.

2. Study the working principles of electrical machines and power converters.
3. Introduce the components of low-voltage electrical installations.

52
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 - -
CO2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - - 1 1 - -

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 - - -

53
 II Semester CS 204 DATA STRUCTURES
(II Semester – for CSE only)
Instruction: 3 hr / week Credits: 3 Assessment: 3
Course objectives:

1. Develop skills to design and analyze linear and nonlinear data structures.
2. Develop algorithms for manipulating linked lists, stacks, queues, trees and graphs.
3. Develop recursive algorithms as they apply to trees and graphs.
4. Strengthen the ability to identify and apply the suitable data structure for the given real world
problem
5. Understand the various techniques of sorting and searching

UNIT I
Introduction: Data types/Objects/Structures, Abstract definition of Data Structures, Overview of
linear and nonlinear data structures, Analysis of algorithms, Algorithm specification, Asymptotic
notation, Time-Space trade-off, Searching: Linear, Binary and Fibonacci search and their complexity
analysis.
Arrays: Definition, Multidimensional arrays, Pointer arrays, Representation of arrays – Row major
and Column major orders, Application of arrays – Polynomials, Sparse matrices representation.

UNIT II
Stacks and Queues: Introduction, ADT, Array representation, Operations and Applications of
Stacks - Evaluation of expressions, Code generation for stack machines, Implementation of
recursion, Factorial calculation and Towers of Hanoi; Circular Queue, Priority Queue, Double ended
queue, Applications of Queues - Simulation, CPU Scheduling; Multiple stacks and queues

UNIT III
Linked Lists: Singly linked lists and chains, Circular linked list, Doubly linked list, Circular doubly
linked list, Complexity analysis of the same, Linked representation of Stacks and Queues,
Applications of linked lists - Polynomial representation, Sparse matrix multiplication, Dynamic
storage management; Generalized list representation, Recursive algorithms for lists, Recursive lists

UNIT IV
Trees: Basic tree terminologies, Binary trees – Definition, Properties, ADT, Representations,
Operations and Applications; Binary Search Trees, Heap Trees, Threaded binary trees, Height
balanced trees – AVL Trees, Red black tree, Splay tree Their operations and complexity analysis.

UNIT V
Sorting Techniques: Insertion sort, Selection sort, Bubble sort, Quick sort, Radix sort Merge sort,
External sort – Introduction, K-way Merge sort.
Graphs: Basic terminologies, Representations, ADT, Operations on graphs – DFS, BFS, Spanning
trees, Biconnected components, Minimum cost spanning trees.

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the students will be able to

1. Choose appropriate data structure for the specified problem definition.

2. Implement linear and non-linear data structures viz. stacks, queues, linked list, trees, graphs.

54
 3. Apply the concept of trees and graph data structures for the real world problems.
4. Comprehend the implementation of sorting and searching algorithms

Text Books:

1. Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahani, “Fundamentals of Data Structures”, Computer Science
Press.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++
Universities Press, Second Edition.
3. Debasis Samanta, Classic Data Structures, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India

Reference Books:

1. Aaron M. Tenenbaum, Yedidyah Langsam and Moshe J. Augenstein “Data Structures Using
C and C++”, PHI Learning Private Limited
2. Jean Paul Trembley and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with
applications”, McGraw Hill.
3. R. Kruse etal, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Pearson Education

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 - - - - -
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - -
CO3 2 - 2 3 3 1 - - - - 1 - - -
CO4 1 2 2 3 - - - - 2 - - - - -

55
 II Semester CS 207 DATA STRUCTURES LAB
(for CSE only)
Instruction: 2 (Lab) hr / week Credits: 1 Assessment: 3
Course Objectives:

1. To understand the practical application of linear and nonlinear data structures.

2. To develop and execute programs in C++/C to solve problems using data structures such as
arrays, linked lists, stacks, queues, trees, and graphs.
3. To develop and execute programs in C to implement various sorting and searching techniques

1. Develop an algorithm to implement stack using arrays. Code it in C++.

2. Develop an algorithm to evaluate a given postfix expression using stack. Code it in C.
3. Develop an algorithm to convert a given infix expression to postfix form using stacks. Code
it in C.
4. Develop algorithms to implement i) Linear queue and ii) Circular queue using arrays. Code
it in C++.
5. Develop an algorithm to implement double ended queue (de queue) using arrays. Code it in
C++.
6. Develop algorithms using dynamic variables and pointers, to construct a singly linked list
consisting of the following information in each node: student id (integer), student name
(character string) and semester (integer). The operations to be supported are:
a. Inserting a nodei) at the front of a list ii) at the rear of the list ii) at any position in the
list
b. Deleting a node based on student id. If the specified node is not present in the list, an
error Message should be displayed.
c. Searching a node based on student id. If the specified node is not present in the list an
error message should be displayed.
d. Displaying all the nodes in the list.

7. Develop an algorithm using dynamic variables and pointers to construct a stack of integers
using singly linked list and to perform the following operations: Code the same in C++.
i) Push, ii) Pop iii) Display (The program should print appropriate messages for stack
overflow and stack empty). Code the same in C++.
8. Develop an algorithm using dynamic variables and pointers to construct a queue of integers
using singly linked list and to perform the following operations:
a. Insert b. Deletec. Display. The program should print appropriate messages for
queue full and queue empty. Code the same in C++.
9. Develop an algorithm to support the following operations on a doubly linked list where each
node consists of integer data object:
a. Create a doubly linked list
b. Insert a new node
c. Delete the specific node
d. Display the contents of the list. Code the same in C++.
10. Develop algorithms to
a. Construct a binary tree of integers.

56
 b. Traverse the binary tree using inorder, preorder and postorder. (both recursive and
non-recursive versions)
c. Display the elements in the tree. Code the same in C++.
11. Develop algorithms to create a binary search tree (BST) and perform the following operations
on it. Find (a) Minimum element (b) Maximum element (c) Search for a given element (d)
Find predecessor of a node (e) Find successor of a node (f) Delete a node with specific key
value. Code the same in C++.
12. Develop an algorithm to construct an AVL tree for the given set of elements. Code it in C++.
13. Develop algorithms to Sort the given list of elements (i.e. numbers or strings)
(a) Insertion sort (b) Merge sort (c) Quick sort (d) Heap sort Code the same in C.
14. Develop algorithms to implement of graph traversals by applying:
(a) BFS (b) DFS. Code the same in C/C++.
15. Develop algorithms to find out a minimum spanning tree of a simple connected undirected
graph by applying: (a) Prim’s algorithm (b) Kruskal’s algorithm Code the same in C/C++.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to

1. Identify the appropriate data structure for given problem.

2. Have practical knowledge on the application of data structures.
3. Analyze the time and space efficiency of the data structure.

Text Books:

1. Object Oriented Programming with ANSI & Turbo C++, Ashok N. Kamthane, Pearson
Education
2. Scheldt H, C: The Complete Reference, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.
3. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++
Universities Press, Second Edition.
4. Data Structures using C and C++, Yedidyah Langsam. MosheJ. Augenstein Aaron M.
Tenenbaum, 2nd Edition, PHI
5. ADTs, Data Structures and Problem Solving with C++, Larry Nyhoff, Pearson Education.
(a) Forest ecosystem. (b) Grassland ecosystem

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - - -
CO2
3 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - - - - -
CO3 3 2 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 - - - -

57
 CE 107 / CE 207 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE Audit Course
(CE 107 for EEE, ECE &CSE) No Univ.Exam
(CE 207 for ChE, CE & ME)
Instruction: 4(L) Credits: 0(Zero) Assessment: 40 + 60

UNIT I
Environmental Studies and Natural Resources
Definition, Scope and importance of Environment, Environmental studies, Need for public
awareness
Components of Environment- Atmosphere, Hydrosphere, Lithosphere.
Renewable and Non-Renewable Resources and associated problems
Water resources: Use and over utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts
over water, dam benefits and problems.
Forest resources: Use and over exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people.
Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, Man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertification.
Mineral resources: Use and overexploitation, Environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies.
Food resources: World food problems, changes caused agriculture and overgrazing, effects of
modern agriculture, fertilizer – pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, Case studies.
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of
alternate energy sources. Case studies.
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.

UNIT II
Ecosystem and Biodiversity
Ecosystem - Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and functions of an ecosystem, Producers,
consumers and decomposers, Energy flow in the ecosystem, Ecological succession, Food chains,
food webs and ecological pyramids.
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem.
(c) Desert ecosystem. (d) Aquatic ecosystem (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
Biodiversity and its conservation:
Definition, genetic species and ecosystem diversity, Biogeographically classification of India.
Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values,
Biodiversity at global, National and local levels, India as a mega-diversity nation.
Hot-spots of biodiversity, Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man – wildlife
conflicts, Conservation of biodiversity: in-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT – III
Environmental pollution and Global Effects
Definition, Causes, Effects, and control measures of (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards
Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes.
Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. Pollution case studiesDisaster management: Floods,
earthquakes, cyclone, landslides, Tsunami. Climate change-Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone
depletion.

58
UNIT – IV
Environment Issues and Management
• Environment and Human health – Epidemic diseases, HIV/AIDS, Aviation Flue, Water
Borne Diseases.
• Environmental Impact Assessment, Sustainable Development, Clean Production and Clean
Development Mechanisms
• Environment Legislation: Environmental Protection Act, Water Act, Air Act, Wild Life
Protection Act, Forest Conservation Act, Public Liability & Insurance Act, Issues involved
in Enforcement of Environmental legislation.

UNIT – V
Social Issues and the Environment
• Population growth, Population Explosion, Population Control, Women and Child
welfare.
• Urbanization, Industrialization, Development projects, Resettlement and Rehabilitation
of people – Problems concerned, Case studies.
• Consumerism and Waste Products Conservation, Public Awareness, Water
Conservation, Rain water harvesting, watershed management, Wasteland reclamation,
Human Rights, Value education, Environmental ethics- Issues and possible solution.
•Role of information Technology in Environment and Human Health.

Text Books / Reference Books :

1. AnubhaKaushik& C P Kaushik, Environmental studies, New age International Publishers,
2008
2. Benny Joseph, Environmental studies, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2005
3. M Chandra Sekhar, Environmental Science, Hi-Tech Publishers, 2004
4. Keerthinarayana and Daniel Yesudian, Principles of Environmental Sciences and
Engineering , Hi-Tech Publishers, 2005
5. SanthoshkumarGarg,RajeshawriGarg and RajniGarg, Ecological and Environmental studies,
Khanna publishers, 2006
6. Gilbert M, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Masters Publication by
Prentice –Hall of India Private Ltd., 1991
7. William P Cunningham and Mary Ann Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd, 2002
8. AmalK.Datta, Introduction to Environmental Science and Engineering, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co.Pvt.Ltd, 2000

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Acquire knowledge in
• Diverse components of environment and natural resources
• Ecosystem and biodiversity & its conservation methods
• Population growth and human health
• Green technology

59
 2. Identify and resolve the issues related to sources of different types of pollutions
3. Provide solutions to individuals, industries and government for sustainable development of
natural resources
4. Apply environmental ethics in protection of diversified ecosystems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 - - - 2 2 1 - - - - - - - -

CO4 - 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - -

********

60
SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS

61
 MA301B-Mathematics – III

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:1T:0P Credits: 4

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT – I
Complex analysis - I: Analytical functions - Cauchy- Reimann equations – Construction of Analytic
functions-Complex integration - Cauchy's theorem - Integral formula - Evaluation of integrals.

UNIT – II
Complex analysis - II: Taylor’s and Laurents’ series- Transformations- Conformal mapping
- Bilineartransformations - Transformation of 1/z, z2, sin z and cos z.

UNIT – III
Complex anaylasis –III: Singularities - Poles - Residues - Residue theorem – Contour integration-
Evaluation of real integrals

UNIT – IV
Partial differential equations - I : Formation of differential equations - Classification - First order
linear partialdifferential equations – Legranges’ linear equation - Method of multipliers - first order
non-linear partial differential equations - Charpits method.

UNIT- V
Partial differential equations - II: Method of separation of variables - One dimensional wave
equation - Heat equation – Laplace’s equation.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Grewal B S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 40th Edition, Khanna Publications, 2007.

2. Venkataraman M K, Engineering Mathematics, Vol. I & II, National Publishing Company,
1993.
3. Venkataraman M K, Engineering Mathematics, National Publishing Company, 1995.
4. Grewal B S, Engineering Mathematics, 13th Edition, Khanna Publications.
5. Kreyszig E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th edition, Wiley, 1998.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to

CO 1: After end of the course, students will be able to understand the analyticity of complex
functions and conformal mappings. Apply Cauchy's integral formula and Cauchy's integral theorem
to evaluate improper integrals along contours.
CO2: Describe conformal mappings between various plane regions. Apply the concepts of complex
analysis in many branches of engineering including the branches of hydrodynamics,
thermodynamics, and particularly quantum mechanics.
CO3: compute the residue of a function and use the Residue theory to evaluate a contour integrals
or an integral over the real line.

62
CO4: Formulate Solve/Classify the solutions of partial differential equations Identify linear and
nonlinear PDE and solve nonlinear PDE by Charpit;s method.
CO5: Apply variables separable methods to solve boundary value problems. Find the solutions of
one-dimensional wave equation, heat equation and Laplace equation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 1 3 - -
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 1 3 - -
CO3 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 1 3 - -
CO4 3 1 3 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 3 - -
CO5 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 2 3 - -

63
 EC302C-Network Theory

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

UNIT-I
Network Theorems: Superposition Theorem– Reciprocity theorem -Thevenin's and Norton's
Theorems – Maximum Power Transfer Theorem- Millman's Theorem ––Tellegen's Theorem –
Compensation Theorem - Application of these Theorems for D.C. circuits and sinusoidal steady state
A.C. circuits, Introduction to Three Phase Circuits.

UNIT-II
Resonance: Series and Parallel Resonance – Resonant frequency, Half power frequencies, bandwidth
and Quality Factor.
Locus diagrams: Current locus diagrams of RL and RC series circuits and two branch parallel circuits.

UNIT-III
Transient Analysis: Time domain analysis of RL, RC, and RLC circuits for D.C. and sinusoidal
excitations – Determination of initial conditions – Concept of time constant –Laplace transforms of
signals and periodic functions and initial and final value theorems – Transient response of RL, RC, and
RLC circuits using Laplace Transform techniques.

UNIT-IV
Network Functions: One-port and Two-port networks – Driving point and transfer functions of
networks – Properties of driving point and transfer functions – Concept of complex frequency, poles
and zeros – Time domain response from pole-zero diagram – Restrictions on pole-zero locations.

UNIT-V
Two-port Network Parameters: Open circuit impedance and short circuit admittance parameters –
Hybrid and inverse-hybrid parameters – Transmission and inverse transmission parameters – Inter
relationships between parameter sets – Series, Parallel, and Cascade connection of two-ports –
Conditions for reciprocity and symmetry of two-port networks. Terminated two-port networks – Image
parameters.
Text/Reference Books:
1. Sudhakar and Shyammohan: Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis, 5th Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill
2. Ravish R. Singh: Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
3. Abhijit Chakrabarti: Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis, 7th Revised Edition, Dhanpat Rai &
Co
4. M. E. Van Valkenburg; “Network analysis”; Pearson Education, Third Revised Edition.

64
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Understand basics electrical circuits with nodal and mesh analysis.
2. Appreciate electrical network theorems.
Apply Laplace Transform for steady state and transient analysis. Determine different network
functions.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

65
 EC303C-Signals and Systems
(Common to EEE, ECE and CSE)
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT I
Introduction to Signals and Systems:
Definition and classification of signals and systems, Basic operations on signals, Elementary signals,
Classification of Continuous-Time and Discrete-Time Systems, Basic System Properties, Linear
Time- Invariant Systems - Discrete-Time LTI Systems, Convolution Sum, Continuous-Time LTI
Systems Convolution Integral. Causal LTI Systems Described by Differential and Difference
Equations.

Signal Analysis:
Analogy between vectors and signals, Orthogonal signal space, Signal approximation using
orthogonal functions, Mean square error, Closed or complete set of orthogonal functions,
Orthogonality in complex functions.

UNIT II
Fourier series and Fourier Transform:
Fourier series Representation of Continuous-Time Periodic Signals, Dirichlet’s conditions, Properties
of Continuous-Time Fourier Series. Trigonometric Fourier Series and Exponential Fourier Series with
examples, Complex Fourier spectrum.

Deriving Fourier Transform from Fourier series, Fourier Transform of standard signals, Fourier
Transform ofPeriodic Signals, Properties of Continuous-Time Fourier Transform,
Magnitude-Phase responses, Parseval’s theorem, Inverse Fourier transform.

Discrete-Time Fourier Transform – Properties, Inverse Discrete-time Fourier Transform.

Introduction to Hilbert Transform.

UNIT III
Convolution and Correlation:
Continuous-time convolution, Convolution sum, Correlation between signals, Cross correlation,
Autocorrelation, Properties, Energy spectral density, Power spectral density, Relation between
convolution and correlation.

UNIT IV
Behavior of continuous time LTI systems:
Distortion less transmission through a system, signal bandwidth, system bandwidth, Ideal LPF, HPF
and BPF characteristics, Causality and Poly-Wiener criterion for physical realization, relationship
between bandwidth and rise time.
Sampling:
Sampling Theorem, Reconstruction of a Signal from its Samples Using Interpolation, types of
sampling-natural sampling, flat- top sampling and impulse sampling, Effect of under sampling -
Aliasing.

66
UNIT V
System Analysis using Laplace and z -Transforms:
Laplace Transform - Region of Convergence – Relation between Laplace and Fourier Transform,
Inverse Laplace Transform, Properties, Analysis and Characterization of LTI Systems Using Laplace
Transform, Z- Transform -Region of Convergence - Properties, Inverse z-Transform, Analysis and
Characterization of LTI Systems Using z-Transforms.

Reference Books:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky, & S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals and
Systems,” Pearson Higher Education, 2nd Ed., 1997.
2. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications”, Pearson, 2006.
3. Simon Haykin and B. Van Veen, “Signals & Systems,” John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2007.
4. B.P. Lathi, “Principles of LINEAR SYSTEMS and SIGNALS,” Oxford Univ. Press,
Second Edition, International version, 2009.
5. A. Anand Kumar, Signals & Systems, PHI, 2011.
6. H. P. Hsu, “Signals and systems”, Schaum’s series, McGraw Hill Education, 2010.
7. Luis F. Chaparro, “Signals and Systems using MATLAB,” Academic Press, 2011.
8. C. L. Philips, J. M. Parr and Eve A. Riskin, “Signals, Systems and Transforms,” Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2008.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to

1. Differentiate between various types of signals and understand the implication of

operations ofsignals
2. Understand and classify systems based on the impulse response behavior of both
continuous-timeand discrete-time systems
3. Perform domain transformation from time to frequency and understand the energy
distribution as a function of frequency and also usefulness of convolution for analyzing
the LTI systems and understand the concepts of power spectral density through
correlation.
4. Solve differential and difference equations with initial conditions using Laplace and
Z- transforms.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3
CO2 - 1 - - - 2 - - - - - -
CO3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2

67
 EC304C-ElectroMagnetic Waves and Transmission Lines
Instruction: (Hours/Week) 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

UNIT-I
Electrostatic Fields: Coulomb’s law, Electric field intensity, Electric fields due to continuous
charge distributions, Electric flux density, Gauss’s law, Applications of Gauss’s law, Electric scalar
potential, Relation between E and V, Energy stored in electrostatic field, Electrostatic Boundary
conditions, Capacitances.
UNIT-II
Magnetostatic fields: Biot-Savart’s law, Magnetic field intensity, Magnetic fields due to
continuous current distributions, Magnetic flux density, Ampere’s circuital law, Applications of
Ampere’s circuital law, Magnetic vector potential, Relation between B and A, Energy stored in
Magnetostatic field, Magnetostatic Boundary conditions, Inductances.
UNIT-III
Time-Varying EM Fields: Faraday’s Law, Transformer EMF, Displacement current, Maxwell's
Equations in Point Form and in Integral Form, Phasor notation for fields, Maxwell's Equations in
time harmonic form. Introduction to waves: Uniform plane wave, Wave equations, Derivation for
γ, solutions for free space- conditions, Derivation for α and β, Derivation for 𝞰,
UNIT-IV
EM waves in a homogeneous medium: Wave propagation in lossy dielectrics, Wave propagation
in lossless dielectrics, Wave propagation in free space, Wave propagation in good conductors, Skin
Depth, Skin Resistance, Polarization, Power, Poynting theorem and Poynting vector.
EM waves in a heterogeneous medium: Reflection of a plane wave at normal incidence:
transmission coefficient, reflection coefficient, Reflection of a plane wave at oblique incidence:
transmission coefficient, reflection coefficient and Brewster angle in both parallel and perpendicular
polarizations.
UNIT-V
Transmission Lines: Transmission line parameters, Transmission line Equations, Input
impedance, Reflection coefficient, VSWR and Power of Transmission line, Smith Chart.
Applications of transmission lines: Load matching measurement, Load impedance measurement.
Text/Reference Books:
1. Mathew N.O. Sadiku and S.V. Kulkarni, "Principles of Electromagnetics", Oxford University
Press
2. William H. Hayt, John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 8th Edition, McGraw-Hill,
2010.
3. E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic waves & Radiating Systems, Prentice Hall, India
4. R.K. Shevgaonkar, Electromagnetic Waves, Tata McGraw Hill India Education, 2008
5. David K. Cheng, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, Pearson, second edition.

68
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to

1. Solve electric field intensity and electric flux density in Electrostatic fields.
2. Solve magnetic field intensity and magnetic flux density in Magnetostatic fields.
3. Analyze Maxwell’s equations in static fields, time varying fields, time harmonic fields and
study Uniform plane wave characteristics.
4. Compute reflection coefficient and transmission coefficient of waves at media interface.
5. Understand characteristics of high frequency transmission lines and its applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/
CO PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1
CO1 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3
CO2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3
CO3 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3
CO4 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3
CO5 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3

69
 EC305C-Digital Logic Design
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

UNIT I
Logic Simplification and Combinational Logic Design: Review of Boolean Algebra and De
Morgan’s Theorem, SOP & POS forms, Canonical forms, Karnaugh maps up to 6 variables,
Binary codes, CodeConversion.

UNIT II
MSI devices like Comparators, Multiplexers, Encoder, Decoder, Driver & Multiplexed
Display, Half and Full Adders, Subtractors, Serial and Parallel Adders, BCD Adder, Barrel
shifter and ALU.

UNIT III
Sequential Logic Design: Building blocks like S-R, JK and Master-Slave JK FF, Edge
triggered FF, Ripple and Synchronous counters, Shift registers, Finite state machines, Design
of synchronous FSM, Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous circuits like
Pulse train generator, Pseudorandom Binary Sequence generator.

UNIT IV
Clock generation Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate,
Specifications, Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS
families and their interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like
FPGA. Logic implementation using Programmable Devices.

UNIT V
VLSI Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles in
VHDL, Data types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis and
Simulation VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.
Text / Reference Books:

1. R.P. Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2009.
2. Douglas Perry, “VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002.
3. W.H. Gothmann, “Digital Electronics- An introduction to theory and practice”, PHI, 2nd
Edition, 2006.
4. D.V. Hall, “Digital Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989
5. Charles Roth, “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition 2012.

Course outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Design and analyze combinational logic circuits.
2. Design & analyze modular combinational circuits with MUX/DEMUX, Decoder, Encoder.
3. Design & analyze synchronous sequential logic circuits.
4. Use HDL & appropriate EDA tools for digital logic design and simulation.

70
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 1

71
 EC306C-Analog Circuits
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT-I
General Amplifiers Characteristics: Concept of Amplifier, Voltage gain, Current gain, Power
gain, Input and Output resistances, Conversion efficiency, Frequency response, Bandwidth,
Distortion,
BJT Amplifiers: Small signal low frequency model of the transistor, Analysis of CE, CB and CC
amplifiers,Approximate model analysis, Effects of coupling and bypass capacitors on low frequency
response, Hybrid-Π model at high frequencies, Calculation of High-Frequency parameters in terms
of Low Frequency parameters, CE short circuit gain, CE current gain with resistive load.
UNIT-II
FET Amplifiers: Small signal model, Analysis of CS, CD and CG amplifiers, comparison of
performance of the three configurations, High frequency FET circuits, CS amplifier at high
frequencies, CD amplifier at high frequencies.
Multistage Amplifiers: Types of coupling, Choice of amplifier configuration, overall voltage gain
and Bandwidth of n-stage amplifier, Darlington and Bootstrap circuits.

UNIT-III
Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, Classification, Effects of negative feedback on gain,
Stability, Noise, Distortion, Bandwidth, input resistance and output resistance.
Oscillators: Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase shift, Wien
bridge etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), Crystal oscillators.

UNIT-IV
Power Amplifiers: Series-Fed Class-A power amplifiers, Transformer coupled class-A power
amplifiers, harmonic distortion, Push-pull amplifiers, Class-B amplifiers, Class-AB operation,
Complementary symmetry Push-Pull class-B Power amplifiers, Cross-over distortion.

UNIT-V
Differential amplifier: Basic structure and principle of operation, calculation of differential gain,
common mode gain, CMRR, circuits to improve CMRR, transfer characteristics.
Operational Amplifier: Ideal op-amp characteristics, Op-amp internal circuit, examples of IC op-
amps, DC and AC characteristics, Inverting and non-inverting modes of operation, voltage
follower.
Text/Reference Books:
1. Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, McGraw-Hill Co
2. Mottershed, “Electronic devices and circuits”, PHI
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, Microelectronics, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, 1988.
4. Salivahanan, “Electronic Devices and circuits”, TMH.
5. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and circuits”, PHI
6. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Bala Jain, “Linear Integrated circuits”, New Age International
publishers, 2018

72
 Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Design and analyze various amplifier circuits.
2. Design sinusoidal oscillators.
3. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

73
 EC309S- Entrepreneurship and Design Thinking
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT-I
Introduction to Entrepreneurship and Design Thinking
What is an idea, how to generate an idea, basic requirements to start an enterprise/start-up.
Introduction to elements and principles of Design, basics of design-dot, line, shape, form as
fundamental design components. Principles of design. Introduction to design thinking, history of
Design Thinking, New materials in Industry.
Activity: Form into groups and discuss about the requirements to start a business
UNIT-II
Design Thinking Process
Design thinking process (empathize, analyze, idea & prototype), implementing the process in
driving inventions, design thinking in social innovations. Tools of design thinking - person,
costumer, journey map, brain storming, product development

Activity: Every student presents their idea in three minutes, every student can present design
process in the form of flow diagram/flow chart etc. Every student should explain about product
development.
UNIT-III
Innovation
Art of innovation, Difference between innovation and creativity, role of creativity and innovation
in organizations. Creativity to Innovation. Teams for innovation, Measuring the impact and value
of creativity.

Activity: Debate on innovation and creativity, Flow and planning from idea to innovation, Debate
on value-based innovation.

UNIT-IV
Product Design
Problem formation, introduction to product design, Product strategies, Product value, Product
planning, product specifications. Innovation towards product design Case studies.

Activity: Importance of modelling, how to set specifications, Explaining their own product design.
UNIT-V
Design Thinking in Business Processes
Design Thinking applied in Business & Strategic Innovation, Design Thinking principles that
redefine business – Business challenges: Growth, Predictability, Change, Maintaining Relevance,
Extreme competition, Standardization. Design thinking to meet corporate needs. Design thinking
for Startups. Defining and testing Business Models and Business Cases. Developing & testing
prototypes.

Activity: How to market our own product, About maintenance, Reliability and plan for startup.

74
 Textbooks:

1. Change by design, Tim Brown, Harper Bollins (2009)

2. Design Thinking for Strategic Innovation, Idris Mootee, 2013, John Wiley & Sons.

Reference Books:

1. Design Thinking in the Classroom by David Lee, Ulysses press

2. Design the Future, by Shrrutin N Shetty, Norton Press
3. Universal principles of design- William lidwell, kritinaholden, Jill butter.
4. The era of open innovation – chesbrough.H

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Able to know the concepts related to Entrepreneurship & design thinking.
2. Explain the fundamentals of Design Thinking and innovation and will equip with design
thinking techniques for solving problems in various sectors.
3. Analyse to work in a multidisciplinary environment and Evaluate the value of creativity
4. Formulate specific problem statements of real time issues

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 1 3 3 2 3 1 1 3 3 - 1 -
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 - 3 -
CO3 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 3 3 - 2 -
CO4 - 2 2 2 3 1 2 3 3 - 1 -

75
 MC310A Constitution of India
Instruction: Hours/Week: 2L:0T:0P Credits: 0
Evaluation Scheme: 100 Marks

UNIT-I
History of Making of the Indian Constitution:
History Drafting Committee, (Composition
& Working)
Philosophy of the Indian Constitution:
PreambleSalient Features
UNIT-II
• Contours of Constitutional Rights & Duties:
• Fundamental Rights
• Right to Equality
• Right to Freedom
• Right against Exploitation
• Right to Freedom of Religion
• Cultural and Educational Rights
• Right to Constitutional Remedies
• Directive Principles of State Policy
• Fundamental Duties.

UNIT-III
• Organs of Governance:
• Parliament
• Composition
• Qualifications and Disqualifications
• Powers and Functions
• Executive
• President
• Governor
• Council of Ministers
• Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges,
Qualifications Powers and Functions

UNIT-IV
• Local Administration:
• District’s Administration head: Role and Importance,
• Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of
Municipal Corporation.
• Pachayati raj: Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat.
• Elected officials and their roles, CEO Zila Pachayat: Position and role.
• Block level: Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments),
• Village level: Role of Elected and Appointed officials,
• Importance of grass root democracy

76
UNIT-V
• Election Commission:
• Election Commission: Role and Functioning.
• Chief Election Commissioner and Election Commissioners.
• State Election Commission: Role and Functioning.
• Institute and Bodies for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women.

Text Books/References:
1. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication.
2. Dr. S. N. Busi, Dr. B. R. Ambedkar framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015.
3. M. P. Jain, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014.
4. D.D. Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the
ability to 1 Students will be able to:
1. Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before the
arrival of
Gandhi in Indian politics.
2. Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the
conceptualization ofsocial reforms leading to revolution in India.
3. Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party [CSP]
under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal of direct
elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.Discuss the passage of the Hindu
Code Bill of 1956.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
- - - - 2 3 2 1 2 - -
CO1
- - - - 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 -
CO2
- - - - 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 -
CO3

77
 EC307L-Basic Electrical Engineering Laboratory

Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
List of Experiments:
1. Basic safety precautions, Introduction and use of measuring instruments – voltmeter,
ammeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Real-life resistors, capacitors and inductors.
2. Measuring the steady-state and transient time-response of R-L, R-C, and R-L-C
circuits to a step change in voltage (transient may be observed on a storage
oscilloscope).
3. Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits – impedance calculation
and verification. Observation of phase differences between current and voltage.
Resonance in R-L-C circuits.
4. Transformers: Observation of the no-load current waveform on an oscilloscope (non-
sinusoidal wave-shape due to B-H curve nonlinearity should be shown along with a
discussion about harmonics).
5. Loading of a transformer: measurement of primary and secondary voltages and
currents, and power.
6. Three-phase transformers: Star and Delta connections. Voltage and Current
relationships (line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral voltage, line and phase currents).
Phase-shifts between the primary and secondary side. Cumulative three-phase power
in balanced three-phase circuits.
7. Demonstration of cut-out sections of machines: dc machine (commutator-brush
arrangement), induction machine (squirrel cage rotor), synchronous machine (field
winging
- slip ring arrangement) and single-phase induction machine.
8. Torque Speed Characteristic of separately excited dc motor.
9. Synchronous speed of two and four-pole, three-phase induction motors. Direction
reversal by change of phase-sequence of connections. Torque-Slip Characteristic of
an induction motor. Generator operation of an induction machine driven at super
synchronous speed.
10. Synchronous Machine operating as a generator: stand-alone operation with a load.
Control of voltage through field excitation.
11. Demonstration of (a) dc-dc converters (b) dc-ac converters – PWM waveform (c) the

78
 use of dc-ac converter for speed control of an induction motor and (d) Components
of LT switchgear.
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course student will be able to:
CO1: Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings.
CO2: Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings.
CO3: Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments.
CO4: Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO /
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2

79
 EC308L-Electronic Devices Laboratory

Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Hands-on experiments related to the course contents Electronic Devices
Laboratory List of Experiments:

1. P-N Junction Diode Characteristics

2. Zener Diode Characteristics
3. Half Wave Rectifiers (without and with filter)
4. Full Wave Rectifiers (without and with filter)
5. CB Characteristics
6. CE Characteristics
7. CC Characteristics
8. FET Characteristics
9. BJT Biasing
10.SCR
Characteristics
11.UJT
Characteristics
12.LDR
characteristics
13.LED
Characteristics
14. Photodiode characteristics

15. Phototransistor characteristics.

Some of the experiments can be done using any Simulation Software.
Prerequisites: None
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course student will be able to:
CO1: Plot the characteristics of electronic devices to understand their behaviour.
CO2: Design, construct and test amplifier circuits, Rectifiers, Special devices and
interpret the results.
CO3: Operate electronic test equipment using hardware/software tools to characterize the
behaviourof devices and circuits.

80
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO/
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 3 - - - 1 2 - - 3 -
CO2 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - 3 -
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 3 -

81
 EC311L-Simulation Laboratory

Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:2P Credits: 01

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
• All the experiments are to be simulated using MATLAB or equivalent software.
• Minimum of 12 - 15 experiments are to be completed.
List of Experiments:
1. Basic Operations on Matrices.
2. Generation of Various Signals and Sequences (Periodic and Aperiodic), such
as Unit Impulse, Unit Step, Square, Saw tooth, Triangular, Sinusoidal, Ramp,
Sinc.
3. Operations on Signals and Sequences such as Addition, Multiplication, Scaling,
Shifting, Folding, Computation of Energy and Average Power.
4. Finding the Even and Odd parts of Signal/Sequence and Real and Imaginary
parts ofSignal.
5. Convolution for Signals and sequences.
6. Auto Correlation and Cross Correlation for Signals and Sequences.
7. Verification of Linearity and Time Invariance Properties of a given
Continuous/Discrete System.
8. Computation of Unit sample, Unit step and Sinusoidal responses of the given LTI
system and verifying its physical realizability and stability properties.
9. Gibbs Phenomenon Simulation.
10. Finding the Fourier Transform of a given signal and plotting its magnitude
and phasespectrum.
11. Waveform Synthesis using Laplace Transform.
12. Locating the Zeros and Poles and plotting the Pole-Zero maps in S-plane and Z-
Plane for the given transfer function and verify its stability.
13. Generation of Gaussian noise (Real and Complex), Computation of its mean, M.S.
Value and its Skew, Kurtosis, and PSD, Probability Distribution Function.
14. Verification of Sampling Theorem. Write a program to generate discrete time
sequence by sampling a continuous time signal. Show that with sampling rates
less than Nyquist rate, aliasing occurs while reconstructing the signal.
15. Write a program to find autocorrelation and cross correlation of given

82
 sequences. Removal of noise by Autocorrelation / Cross correlation.
16. Write a program to verify Linearity and Time Invariance properties of a
given Continuous/Discrete System
17. Extraction of Periodic Signal masked by noise using Correlation.

18. Write a program to find magnitude and phase response of first order low
pass and high pass filter. Plot the responses in logarithmic scale.
19. Write a program to find response of a low pass filter and high pass filter, when
a speechsignal is passed through these filters.
20. Write a program to generate Complex Gaussian noise and find its mean,
variance, Probability Density Function (PDF) and Power Spectral Density
(PSD).
21. Generate a Random data (with bipolar) for a given data rate (say 10kbps). Plot
the samefor a time period of 0.2 sec.
Prerequisites: None

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course student will be able to:
CO1: Learn how to use the MATLAB software and know syntax of
MATLAB programming. CO2: Understand how to simulate different types
of signals and system response.
CO3: Find the Fourier Transform of a given signal and plot amplitude
and phasecharacteristics.
CO4: Analyze the response of different systems when they are excited by different
signals and plot power spectral density of signals

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 3 - - - 1 2 - - 3 -

CO2 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - 3 -

CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 3 -

CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - 3 -

83
 EC401C-Linear Control Systems

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Unit-I
Introduction to control problem:
Industrial Control examples, System Representation, Classification of systems, Feedback Control,
Benefits of Feedback- Open-Loop and Closed-loop systems, Advantages and Disadvantages of control
systems, Industrial Control examples.
Mathematical models of physical systems: Electrical, Mechanical and Electro-Mechanical, Transfer
function models of linear time-invariant systems: Potentiometers, Synchros, LVDT, dc and ac
servomotors, Tacho- generators, electro hydraulic valves, hydraulic servomotors, electro pneumatic
valves, pneumatic actuators. Closed-loop systems, Block diagram algebra, Reduction techniques and
Signal flow graph.
Unit-II
Time Response Analysis:
Standard test signals, Time response of first and second order systems for standard test inputs.
Application of initial and final value theorem. Stability, steady-state accuracy, transient accuracy,
disturbance rejection, insensitivity and robustness. Design specifications for second-order systems
based on the time-response, Steady state errors and error constants, Performance specifications in time-
domain error, Static and Generalized error constants, Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz Criteria,
Relative Stability analysis, Root-Locus technique, Construction of Root-loci.
Unit-III
Frequency-response analysis:
Introduction to Frequency domain specifications -Relationship between time and frequency response,
Polar plots, Bode plot, stability in frequency domain, Nyquist plots. Nyquist stability criterion. Relative
stability using Nyquist criterion – gain and phase margin. Performance specifications in frequency-
domain, Frequency domain methods of design.
Unit-IV
Introduction to Controller Design:
Compensation & their realization in time & frequency domain, Introduction to controllers (PI, PD,
PID), Application of Proportional, Integral and Derivative Controllers, Need for Lead and Lag
compensators, Applications of compensators, Comparison of controllers and compensators, Problems.

84
Unit-V
State variable Analysis:
Concepts of state, state variables, State space model for linear continuous time functions,
Diagonalization of
State Matrix. Solution of state equations. Eigen values and Stability Analysis. Concept of
controllability and observability.
Text/Reference Books:
1. M. Gopal, “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 1997.
2. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, Seventh edition, 1995.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, second edition, 1991.
4. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International, 2009K. L.
Chung.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Identify the various control system components and their representations.
2. Analyze the various time domain parameters.
3. Analysis the various frequency response plots and its system.
4. Apply the concepts of various system stability criterions and design various transfer functions
of digital control system using state variable models.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

CO2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

CO4 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

85
 EC402C-Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT-I
Probability: Sets and set operations, Probability space, Events, Probability Definitions and
Axioms, Mathematical Model of Experiments, Joint Probability, Conditional probability, Total
Probability, and Bayes theorem, Combinatorial probability and sampling models.
Random Variable: Definition of a Random Variable, Conditions for a Function to be a Random
Variable, Discrete random variables, probability mass function, probability distribution function,
example random variables and distributions. Continuous random variables, probability density
function, probability distribution function, Properties, Mixed Random Variable, example
distributions - Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Gaussian, Exponential, Raleigh etc.
UNIT-II
Multiple Random Variables: Vector Random Variables, Joint distribution Function, Properties of
Joint Distribution, Marginal Distribution Functions, functions of one and two random variables,
Conditional Distribution and Density, Methods of defining Conditioning Event, Conditional
Density, Properties. Statistical Independence, Sum of Two Random Variables, Sum of Several
Random Variables, Markov, Chebyshev and Chernoff bounds.
UNIT-III
Operations on Multiple Random Variables: Expected Value of a Function of Random Variables,
moments of random variable, Characteristic functions of a random variable, Joint Moments about
the Origin, Joint Central Moments, Joint Characteristic Functions and Joint Gaussian Random
Variables. Random sequences and modes of convergence (everywhere, almost everywhere,
probability, distribution and mean square), Limit theorems: Strong and weak laws of large numbers,
Central Limit Theorem, (Proof not expected), Unequal Distribution, Equal Distributions.
Transformations of Multiple Random Variables, Linear Transformations of Gaussian Random
Variables.
UNIT-IV
Random Process– Temporal Characteristics: The Random Process Concept, Classification of
Processes, Stationary processes, First-Order Stationery Processes, Second- Order and Wide-Sense
Stationarity, (N- Order) and Strict-Sense Stationarity, Mean and covariance functions, Time
Averages and Ergodicity, Mean-Ergodic Processes, Correlation-Ergodic Processes, Autocorrelation
Function & Its Properties, Cross- Correlation Function & its Properties, Covariance Functions,
Gaussian Random Processes, Poisson Random Process.
Random Processes – Spectral Characteristics: Power spectral density, Properties, Relationship
between Power Spectrum and Autocorrelation Function, The Cross-Power Density Spectrum,
Properties, Relationship between Cross-Power Spectrum and Cross-Correlation Function.

86
UNIT-V
Transmission of random process through LTI systems: System Response, Convolution, Mean
and Mean- squared Value of System Response, autocorrelation Function of Response, Cross-
Correlation Functions of Input and Output, Spectral Characteristics of System Response: Power
Density Spectrum of Response, Cross-Power Density Spectrums of Input and Output, properties of
white noise, Band pass, Band-Limited and Narrowband Processes, Properties.

Text / Reference Books:

1. H. Stark and J. Woods, Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing, 3rdEdition, Pearson Education.
2. Peyton Z. Peebles, Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles, Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, 2001.
3. Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishnan Pillai, Probability, Random Variables and
StochasticProcesses, PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
4. Hisashi Kobayashi, Brian L. Mark and William Turin, Probability, Random Processes, and
Statistical Analysis, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
5. John J. Shynk, Probability, Random Variables, and Random Processes Theory and Signal
Processing Applications, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey, 2013, ISBN: 978-
0-470-24209-4.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to

1. Understand representation of random signals.

2. Obtain Distribution function, Density functions, and Conditional density functions for different
Random variables.
3. Make use of theorems related to random signals.
4. Investigate temporal and spectral characteristics of random processes.
5. Able to Model of different Noise Sources and understand propagation of random signals in LTI
systems.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 3 - - 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 3 - - 2

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 3 - - 2

CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 2

87
 HS403C-Managerial Economics and Accountancy
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT – I
Introduction to Engineering Economics, Fundamental concepts, Time value of money, Cash flow and
Time Diagrams, choosing between alternative investment proposals, Methods of Economic analysis
(pay back, ARR, NPV, IRR and B/C ratio), The effect of borrowing on investment, Equity vs Debt
Financing, concept of leverage, Income tax leverage.
UNIT – II
Depreciation and methods of calculating depreciation (straight line, sum of the years digit method,
Declining balance method, Annuity method, Sinking fund method), National income accounting
Methods of estimation, Various concepts of National Income, Significance of National income
Estimation and its limitations.
UNIT – III
Inflation: Definition, Process and Theories of inflation and Measure of control. New Economic Policy
1991(Industrial Policy, Trade Policy, Fiscal Policy), Impact on Industry.
UNIT – IV
Accounting Principles, procedure, Double entry system, Journal, ledger, Trial balance,
Cashbook, preparation of Trading and Profit and Loss account, Balance sheet.
UNIT – V
Cost Accounting: Introduction, Classification of costs, Methods of costing, Techniques of costing,
Cost sheet and preparation of cost sheet, Break-even Analysis, Meaning and its application, Limitation.
Text/ Reference Books:
1. Henry Malcom Steiner, Engineering Economics Principles, 2nd Edition, McGraw
HillEducation, 1996.
2. Dewett. K.K., Modern Economic Theory, Sultan Chand and Co., 2006.
3. A.N. Agarwal, Indian Economy, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi.
4. Jain and Narang, Accounting Part-I, Kalyani Publishers, 2011.
5. Arora, M.N. Cost Accounting: Principles and Practice, 12th Edition, Vikas Publication, 2012.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Understand Macro Economic environment of the business and its impact
onenterprise.
2. Identify various cost elements of the product and its effect on decision making.
3. Understand the concepts of financial management and smart investment.
4. Prepare the Accounting records and interpret the data for Managerial Decisions.

88
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO/ PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 3
CO1 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO2 - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 -
CO3 - 1 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO4 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -

89
 EC404C-IC Applications

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
UNIT – I
Op-Amp Applications: Scale changer/inverter, Summing amplifier, Instrumentation amplifier,
Instrumentation amplifier IC-AD620, DC and AC amplifiers, V to I and I to V converters, Precision
rectifiers, Log and Antilog amplifiers, multiplier and divider, Analog multiplier IC-AD633,
Differentiator, Integrator, Analog computation.

UNIT – II
Comparators and waveform generators: Comparator, Regenerative comparator (Schmitt Trigger),
Astable and mono-stable multi-vibrators using op-amp, Triangular wave generator, Sine wave
generators using op-amp. IC waveform generator (8038).

UNIT – III
Voltage regulators: Series op-amp regulator, IC voltage regulators, 723 General purpose regulator,
Switching regulators. Active filters: Low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject and all pass filters,
transformation, State variable filter, Switched capacitor filters, Switched capacitor filter ICs.
UNIT – IV
555 Timer: Description of functional diagram, Monostable operation. Applications in monostable mode,
Astable operation, Applications in astable mode, Schmitt trigger. Phase Locked Loops: PLL-
introduction, block schematic, principles and description individual blocks, IC PLL (565), Voltage
controlled oscillator (566), PLL applications- Frequency multiplication, Frequency translation, FM &
FSK demodulation.

UNIT – V
D-A and A-D Converters: Basic DAC Techniques, Weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder DAC,
Inverted R-2R ladder, Monolithic DAC IC-1409, A-D converters, direct type ADCs, the parallel
comparator(flash) A/D converter, The counter type A/D converter, Servo tracking A/D converter,
Successive approximation converter, Integrating type of ADCs, Charge balancing ADC, Dual-slope
ADC, DAC/ADC specifications.
Text/ Reference Books:
1. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Bala Jain, “Linear Integrated circuits”, New Age International
publishers, 2018.
2. Ramakant A.Gayakward, “Op-amps and linear Integrated circuits”, LPE, 4th edition,
PearsonEducation.
3. S.Salivahanan, V.S.Kanchana Bhaaskaran “Linear Integrated circuits”, TMH, 2008.
4. David A. Bell, “Operational amplifiers and Linear ICs”, PHI, EEE, 1997.
5. 5. J.V. Wait, L.P. Huelsman and GA Korn, Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and
applications, McGraw Hill, 1992.

90
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits.
2. Understand the functioning of voltage regulators and design IC based voltage regulators,
3. Understand the functioning of 555 timer and design 555 timer-based circuits.
4. Understand the functioning of PLL and design PLL based circuits.
5. Design ADC and DAC circuits

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 3
CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 1

91
 EC405C-Analog Communications

Instruction: (Hours/Week) 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Unit – I

Introduction: Elements of communication systems, Information, Messages and Signals, Modulation,

Modulation Methods, Modulation Benefits and Applications.
Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation: Baseband and carrier communication, Amplitude
Modulation (AM), Rectifier detector, Envelope detector, Double sideband suppressed carrier (DSB-
SC) modulation & its demodulation, Switching modulators, Ring modulator, Balanced modulator,
Frequency mixer, sideband and carrier power of AM, Generation of AM signals, Single sideband
(SSB) transmission, Time domain representation of SSB signals & their demodulation schemes (with
carrier, and suppressed carrier), Generation of SSB signals, Vestigial sideband (VSB) modulator &
demodulator, Frequency division multiplexing (FDM), Illustrative Problems.

UNIT-II
Angle Modulation & Demodulation: Concept of instantaneous frequency, Generalized concept of
angle modulation- Frequency Modulation & Phase modulation : Bandwidth of angle modulated waves,
Narrow band frequency modulation (NBFM) and Wide band FM (WBFM), Verification of Frequency
modulation bandwidth relationship, Features of angle modulation, Generation of FM waves-Indirect
method, Direct generation; Demodulation of FM, Band pass limiter, Practical frequency demodulators,
Small error analysis, Pre-emphasis, & De-emphasis filters, FM Capture Effect, Illustrative Problems.

UNIT-III
Noise in Communication Systems: Thermal noise, Time domain representation of narrowband noise,
filtered white noise, Quadrature representation of narrowband noise, Envelope of narrowband noise
plus sine wave, Signal to noise ratio & probability of error, Noise equivalent bandwidth, Effective noise
temperature, and Noisefigure, Baseband systems with channel noise, Performance analysis (i.e. finding
SNR expression) of AM, DSB-SC, SSB-SC, FM, PM in the presence of noise, Illustrative Problems.

UNIT-IV
Radio Receivers: Working principle of Super heterodyne AM and FM Receivers along with suitable
block diagrams, Sensitivity, Selectivity and fidelity.

Analog Pulse Modulation Schemes: Pulse amplitude modulation – Natural sampling, flat top
sampling and Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) & demodulation, Pulse-Time Modulation – Pulse
Duration and Pulse Position modulations, and demodulation schemes, PPM spectral analysis,
Illustrative Problems.

UNIT-V
Information Theory: Introduction, Information and Entropy, and its properties, source coding
Theorem, DataCompaction – Prefix coding, Huffman coding, Discrete Memory less channels, Mutual
Information, and its properties, Channel capacity, Channel coding Theorem, Application to
binary symmetric channels, differential entropy and mutual information, Information capacity

92
theorem, implication of information capacity theorem, Rate Distortion, Illustrative problems
.
Text Books:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” Oxford Univ. press, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,” by John Wiley & Sons,3rdEdition, 2010.
3. Sham Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley-India edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals &
Noise in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.
2. Herbert Taub&Donald L Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 3rdEdition, 2009.
3. R.E. Ziemer& W.H. Tranter, “Principles of Communication-Systems Modulation & Noise”,
JaicoPublishing House, 5thedition, 2001.
4. George Kennedy and Bernard Davis, “Electronics & Communication System”, TMH,2004.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to
CO1: Understand the concepts of various Amplitude, Angle and Pulse Modulation schemes.
Understand the concepts of information theory with random processes. (L1)
CO2: Apply the concepts to solve problems in analog and pulse modulation schemes. (L2)
CO3: Analysis of analog communication system in the presence of noise. (L3)
CO4: Compare and contrast design issues, advantages, disadvantages and limitations of various
modulation schemes in analog communication systems. (L4)
CO5: Solve basic communication problems & calculate information rate and channel capacity of a
discrete communication channel. (L5)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 3
CO1 1 2 1 _ 1 1 _ _ _ _ _ 1
CO2 2 2 1 _ 1 1 _ _ _ _ _ 1
CO3 2 2 1 _ 1 1 _ _ _ _ _ 1
CO4 2 2 1 _ 1 1 _ _ _ _ _ -

93
 EC409S- Python Programming

Instruction: (Hours/Week) 1L:0T:2P Credits: 2

Evaluation Scheme: 100 Marks
Unit – I
Introduction to Python Programming Language
Introduction to Python Language: What is Python? Why Python? Installing Python on Windows,
Python IDLE,Python Literals, Python Data Types Basic Input-Output operations, Operators in Python,
Decision making in Python, Conditional execution in Python, Logical and bit operations in Python,
Naming Conventions, String Operations, String Slices, String Operators, Numeric Data Types,
Conversions, Data type conversion, Built in Functions.
UNIT-II
Python Built-in Data Structures
Introduction, List, Tuples, Dictionary, Sets, List Operations append, extend, insert, remove, pop,
slice, and reverse, List Comprehension, Dictionary operations, Sorting Dictionaries, Copying
Collections, Set operations. Standard python modules math, time, IO and time, Regular
expressions, multi-threading.
UNIT-III
Classes & Objects
Classes in Python, Principles of Object-Oriented programming, Creating Classes, Instance Methods,
File Organization, Special Methods, Class Variables, Inheritance, Polymorphism, Type Identification,
Custom Exception Classes.

UNIT-IV
Functions, I/O, Exception Handling in Python
Introduction: Defining your own functions, keyword and optional parameters, mapping functions,
lambda functions, ∙Data Streams ∙ Creating Your Own Data Streams ∙ Access Modes ∙ Writing Data
to a File ∙ Reading Data from a File ∙ Additional File Methods ∙ Using Pipes as Data Streams ∙
Handling IO Exceptions ∙ Working with Directories ∙ Metadata ∙ Errors ∙ Run Time Errors ∙ The
Exception Model ∙ Exception Hierarchy
∙ Handling Multiple Exceptions.
UNIT-V
Python API development.
Introduction to API, Python API programming, Python web application frameworks, REST API,
Python Flask, Flask Environment, Routing, Cookies, Sessions, Running Flask Application, Testing
API with POSTMAN client

94
 Text Books:
1. Introduction to Computation and Programming using Python, by John Guttag, PHI
Publisher,Revised and Expanded version (Referred by MIT)
2. Python Programming using problem solving Approach by Reema Thareja, Oxford
University, Higher Education Oxford University Press; First edition (10 June 2017), ISBN-
10: 0199480173
3. Data Structures and Algorithms in Python by Michael T Goodrich and Robertto Thamassia,
Micheal S Goldwasser, Wiley Publisher (2016)
4. Fundamentals of Python first Programmes by Kenneth A Lambert, Copyrighted
material CourseTechnology Inc. 1 st edition (6th February 2009)

REFERENCES:
1. Dive into Python, Mike 2. Learning Python, 4th Edition by Mark Lutz 3. Programming Python,
4th Edition by Mark L
2. Fundamentals of Python Programming, Richard L. Halterman Updated content of the book
is maintained under the URL:http://python.cs.southern.edu/pythonbook/pythonbook.pdf
3. The official Python Tutorial. http://docs.python.org/tut/ How to think like a computer
scientist (interactive) http://interactivepython.org/runestone/static/thinkcspy/index.html
4. How to think like a computer scientist http://openbookproject.net/thinkcs/python/english3e/
5. Code Academy Python http://www.codecademy.com/tracks/python
6. A useful hands-on book: http://anh.cs.luc.edu/python/hands-on/3.1/Hands-onPythonTutorial.pdf

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to
1. Apply the OOP principles and best practices of python programming.
2. Write clear and effective pythonic code.
3. Create applications using python programming.
4. Implementing databases using SQLite and Access databases using python programming.
5. Understand and feel comfortable in working with web application frameworks.
6. Develop APIs required for the web applications using web frameworks like Flask and Fast API.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
CO6

95
 EC406L-Digital Logic Design Laboratory
Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.Realization of Boolean Expressions using Gates
2.Design and realization of logic gates using universal gates
3.Design and realization of a 4 – bit Gray to Binary and Binary to Gray Converter
4.Verify the functionality of Mux and Decoder ICs
5.Design and realization of 4-bit comparator
6.Verify the functionality of Flip-Flop ICs
7. Mod-N counter using 7490 and 74190.
8. Shift register IC 7495.
Note: Implement using digital
ICs.VHDL Programming:

1. Write structural and dataflow VHDL models for

a) 4-bit ripple carry adder. b) 4-bit carry Adder – cum Subtractor.
c) 2-digit BCD adder /subtractor d) 4-bit carry look ahead adder e) 8-bit comparator

2. Write a VHDL program in structural model for

a) 16:1 mux realization b) 3:8 decoder realization through 2:4 decoder
3. Write a VHDL program in behavioral model for
a) 16:1 mux b) 3:8 decoder c) 8:3 encoder d) 8 bit parity generator and checker

4. Write a VHDL program in structural and behavioral models for

a) 8 bit asynchronous up-down counter b) 8 bit synchronous up-down counter

5. Write a VHDL program for 4-bit sequence detector through Mealy and Moore state machines.

6. Write a VHDL program in behavioral model for 8-bit shift and add multiplier.

7. Write a VHDL program in structural model for 8-bit Universal Shift Register.

Some of the experiments can be done using any Simulation Software.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to
1. Construct Basic combinational Circuits and Verification of its functionality
2. Construct Sequential Circuits and Verification of its functionality
3. Write structural, behavioral and data flow models for digital circuits
4. Simulate VHDL models of digital circuits

96
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 1

97
 EC407L-Analog Circuits Laboratory
Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Hands-on experiments related to the course contents Analog Circuits.

Prerequisites: Electronic Devices Laboratory.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course student will be able to:
List of Experiments:
1. Common Emitter Amplifier.
2. Common Collector amplifier
3. Two Stage RC coupled amplifier
4. Voltage series feedback amplifier
5. Voltage shunt feedback amplifier
6. Current series feedback amplifier
7. Current shunt feedback amplifier
8. RC phase shift oscillator
9. Wien bridge oscillator
10. LC/ crystal oscillator.
11.Class A Power Amplifier (Transformer
less) 12.Class B Complementary Symmetry
Amplifier12.Differential amplifier
13.Operational amplifier as (i) Inverting amplifies, (ii) Non-Inverting amplifier (III)
Voltagefollower
Some of the experiments can be done using any Simulation Software.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will have the ability to
1. Know about the usage of equipment/components/software tools used to conduct the
experiments in analog circuits.
2. Conduct the experiment based on the knowledge acquired in the theory about various
analog circuits using BJT/MOSFETs to find the important parameters of the circuit
(viz. Voltage gain, Current gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances etc)
experimentally.
3. Analyze the given analog circuit to find required important metrics of it theoretically
and Compare the experimental results with that of theoretical ones and infer the
conclusions.
4. Draw the relevant graphs between important metrics of the system from the observed
measurements.

98
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2

99
 EC408L-IC Applications Laboratory
Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Hands-on experiments related to the course contents
EC408L. List of Experiments:
1. Study and Operation of IC testers, pulse generator and digital trainer.
2. Frequency response of inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
3. Measurement of Op.amp parameters: (i) Offset voltage (ii) Offset current (iii) CMRR
and (iv)Slew rate
4. Op-amp monostable and astable multivibrators.
5. Design 2’s complement adder/subtractor using IC74283 and verify experimentally.
6. Low voltage regulator IC 723.
7. 555 timer: Monostable and astable multivibrators.
8. IC PLL (565) applications- Frequency multiplication, Frequency translation, FM &
FSKdemodulation.
9. Voltage controlled oscillator (566)
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
1. Measure the parameters of IC 741 Op-amp.
2. Design applications of IC 741 Op-amp
3. Realize analog filters using Op-amp.
4. Design multivibrators using 555 IC.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - 1 1

100
THIRD YEAR
SYLLABUS

101
 EC501C- Computer Organization & Architecture
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview: It is important to understand Computer Architecture in order to structure a program
so that it runs efficiently on a real machine. When selecting a system to use, it is important to understand
the tradeoff among various components, so you can accurately compare competing systems, and
understand technical literature on new computer systems. This course will cover the basic concepts of
Computer organization and its Architecture that are important for you to understand, including the CPU
control and data-path, memory systems including caching and virtual memory, and input/output
subsystems.

Prerequisite Courses: Digital Logic Design

Course Objectives: The purpose of the course is

1. To understand the structure of a computer and its operations.
2. To understand the RTL and Micro-level operations and control in a computer.
3. Understanding the concepts of computer arithmetic, instruction set design, micro-programmed
control unit, pipelining and vector processing, I/O Systems and memory organization, and operating
systems.

UNIT - I:
Basic Structure of Computers: Computer Types, Functional Unit, Basic Operational Concepts, Bus
Structures, Software, Performance, Multiprocessors and Multi Computers, Data Representation, Fixed
Point Representation, Floating – Point Representation.

Register Transfer Language and Micro Operations: Register Transfer Language, Register Transfer
Bus and Memory Transfers, Arithmetic Micro Operations, Logic Micro Operations, Shift Micro
Operations, Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit, Instruction Codes, Computer Registers Computer Instructions
– Instruction Cycle, Memory – Reference Instructions, Input – Output and Interrupt, STACK
Organization, Instruction Formats, Addressing Modes, DATA Transfer and Manipulation, Program
Control, Reduced Instruction Set Computer.

UNIT - II:
Micro Programmed Control: Control Memory, Address Sequencing, Microprogram Examples,
Design of Control Unit, Hard Wired Control, Microprogrammed Control.
The Memory System: Basic Concepts of Semiconductor RAM Memories, Read-Only Memories,
Cache Memories Performance Considerations, Virtual Memories Secondary Storage, Introduction to
RAID.
UNIT - III:
Input-Output Organization: Peripheral Devices, Input-Output Interface, Asynchronous Data Transfer
Modes, Priority Interrupt, Direct Memory Access, Input –Output Processor (IOP), Serial
Communication; Introduction to Peripheral Components, Interconnect (PCI) Bus, Introduction to
Standard Serial Communication Protocols like RS232, USB, IEEE 1394.

102
 UNIT - IV:
Operating Systems Overview: Overview of Computer Operating Systems Functions, Protection and
Security, Distributed Systems, Special Purpose Systems, Operating Systems Structures-Operating
System Services and Systems Calls, System Programs, Operating Systems Generation.
Memory Management: Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Structure of The Page
Table, Segmentation, Virtual Memory, Demand Paging, Page-Replacement Algorithms, Allocation of
Frames, Thrashing Case Studies - UNIX, Linux, Windows.
Principles of Deadlock: System Model, Deadlock Characterization, Deadlock Prevention, Detection
and Avoidance, Recovery from Deadlock.

UNIT - V:
File System Interface: The Concept of a File, Access Methods, Directory Structure, File System
Mounting, File Sharing, Protection.

File System Implementation: File System Structure, File System Implementation, Directory
Implementation, Allocation Methods, Free-Space Management.

Text Books:
1. Computer Organization – Carl Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, Safea Zaky, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. Computer Systems Architecture – M. Moris Mano, IIIrd Edition, Pearson
3. Operating System Concepts- Abraham Silberchatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, 8th Edition, John
Wiley.

References:
1. Computer Organization and Architecture – William Stallings Sixth Edition, Pearson
2. Structured Computer Organization – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, 4th Edition PHI
3. Fundamentals of Computer Organization and Design - Sivaraama Dandamudi Springer Int. Edition.
4. Operating Systems – Internals and Design Principles, Stallings, sixth Edition–2009, Pearson
Education.
5. Modern Operating Systems, Andrew S Tanenbaum 2nd Edition, PHI.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
1. Visualize the organization of different blocks in a computer.
2. Use micro-level operations to control different units in a computer.
3. Have knowledge about the organization of Arithmetic and Logical unit and I/O unit.
4. Understand the design of Memory unit, and the overview of computer system hardware and learn
about major activities of an Operating systems in a computer with regard to file management, and
operating system functions.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - -

103
 EC502C Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview: The purpose of this course is to teach students the fundamentals of Microprocessor
and Microcontroller systems. The student will be able to incorporate these concepts into their electronic
designs for other courses where control can be achieved via a Microprocessor / Microcontroller
implementation.

This course will start with a discussion on a simple microprocessor, 8085. Understanding this
architecture is the basis to follow any other complex CPU architecture. It will be followed by a
complete overview of a range of microcontrollers covering 8051, PIC, AVR and ARM. The hardware
intricacies of these processors and their programming will be covered.
Pre-requisite Courses: Digital Logic Design, Analog Circuits.

Course Objectives: The purpose of the course is

1. To familiarize the Architecture, Instructions and Timings of microprocessors and micro controllers.
2. To introduce 8051 architecture and programming of microcontrollers.
3. To provide the knowledge about interfacing techniques of I/O and memory.
4. To understand the concepts of ARM architecture and Advanced ARM processors.
Unit -I
Overview of microcomputer systems and their building blocks, Introduction to 8-bit microprocessor
(8085) Architecture, addressing modes, Instruction set, Machine cycles, instruction cycle and timing
states, instruction timing diagrams, simple programs in 8085.

Unit -II
Semiconductor memories: RAM, ROM, SRAM, and DRAM. Memory interfacing, concepts of
interrupts and Direct Memory Access.
8086 microprocessor – Architecture, Instruction set, Addressing modes, Interrupt system. Minimum
mode 8086 system, Maximum mode 8086 system and timing diagrams. Concepts of virtual memory,
Cache memory, Architectures of 286, and 386 processors.

Unit -III
8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, register set, addressing modes, Instruction set, Interrupt structure,
I/O ports functions, timer and serial port operations, External memory interfacing with 8051.
Assembly language programming of 8051, Parallel I/O Ports, Interrupts, Timer and Counter, Serial
Communication Programming.

Unit -IV
I/O interfacing: LED, LCD, Keyboard, Stepper motor, DC Motor, ADC, DAC Interface to 8051.
Assemblers and compilers, C language programs, Programming and debugging tools.
Serial Communication and Bus Interface: Serial Communication Standards, Serial Data Transfer
Scheme, Onboard communication interfaces - I2C, SPI, and CAN; External communication interfaces
- 9-pin RS-232, USB, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and ZigBee. Architectures of PIC, Architecture of AVR.

104
 Unit -V
ARM 32-bit Microcontroller: Thumb-2 technology and applications of ARM, Architecture of ARM
Cortex M3, Various Units in the architecture, debugging support, General Purpose Registers, Special
Registers, exceptions, interrupts, stack operation, reset sequence. (Text 5: Ch 1, 2, 3)
Text/Reference Books:
1. R. S. Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture: Programming and Applications with the 8085/8080A,
Penram International Publishing, 1996. (UNIT I).
2. D A Patterson and J H Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design The hardware and software
interface”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers. (UNIT II).
3. Barry B. Brey, The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80, 86, 80286, 80386 80486, Pentium,
Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4, Architecture, Programming and
interfacing, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003, Pearson Education, 2004.
(UNIT II).
4. Kenneth J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications”,
Penram International Publishing/ Thomson Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2005.
5. Joseph Yiu, The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3‖, 2nd Edition, Newnes, (Elsevier),
2010. (UNIT V).
Course Outcomes: Upon completing this course, the student will have the ability to:

1. Do assembly language programming.

2. Do interfacing design of peripherals like, I/O, A/D, D/A, timer etc and develop systems using
different microcontrollers.
3. Understand the usage of Communication interfaces with Microcontrollers.
4. Understand design ARM / PIC Microcontroller-based systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 3 - - 2 - -
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 3 - - 2 1 -
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 3 - - 2 - -
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - 1

105
 EC503C-Digital Signal Processing
Instruction : Hours/Week : 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks : 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:

The course covers theory and methods for digital signal processing including basic principles

governing the analysis and design of discrete-time systems as signal processing devices. Analyze the

digital signals using various digital transforms DFT,FFT etc. Review of discrete-time linear, time-

invariant systems, Fourier transforms and z-transforms. Introduction to Multirate signal processing,

TMS DSP processors.

Course Learning Objectives:

1. To describe signals mathematically and understand how to perform mathematical operations on
signals.
2. It will provide knowledge of Digital filter.
3. Design and develop the basic digital system.
4. To discuss multi rate signal processing and applications.
5. Knowledge on TMS DSP processors and their applications.

Unit -1
Discrete Fourier Transform:
Review of Discrete-time Fourier Transform, Z-Transform, Discrete Fourier transform – Properties,
linear convolution, circular convolution of sequences using DFT. Computation of DFT.
Fast Fourier Transforms: Fast Fourier transforms (FFT)-Radix2 decimation in time and decimation
in frequency FFT algorithms, inverse FFT and FFT for composite N.

Unit-2
IIR Digital Filters: Analog filter approximations-Butterworth and Chebyshev, design of IIR digital
filters from analog filters, design examples: analog-digital transformations. Realization structures for
IIR filters – direct, canonic, cascade, parallel forms.

Unit-3
FIR Digital Filters: Characteristics of FIR digital filters, frequency response. Design of FIR digital
filters using window techniques, frequency sampling technique. Realization structures of FIR Filter -
Transversal, Poly-phase and Linear phase structures. comparison of IIR and FIR filters.

Unit -4
Multirate Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals: Basic sample rate alteration devices, Multirate
Structures for sampling rate Converters, Multistage design of decimator and Interpolator, Polyphase
Decomposition.

106
Unit -5
DSP PROCESSORS:
Architecture of TMS320C5X: Introduction, Bus structure, Central Arithmetic Logic Unit, Auxiliary
Register ALU, Index Register, Block Move Address Register, Parallel Logic Unit, Memory mapped
Registers, Program controller, some flags in the status registers, On-chip memory, On-chip
peripherals.

Text Books
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms
and Applications”, Pearson Education/PHI, 4th ed., 2007.
2. Sanjit K Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing: A computer-based approach”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,
3rd edition, 2009.
3. A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schaffer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of
India.
4. B. Venkataramani, M.Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and
Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. Handouts on DSP Processors.
6. Texas Instruments DSP Processor user manuals and application notes

Course Outcomes:
Students must be able to:
CO1: Apply DFT for the analysis of digital signals and systems
CO2: Design IIR and FIR filters
CO3: Design the Multirate Filters
CO4: Analyze and apply suitable DSP algorithm for specific application

Mapping of course outcomes with the program objectives:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 - 1

CO2 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1

CO3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - - -

CO4 2 - 2 2 - 3 2 2 - - 3 - - -

107
 EC504C- Antennas & Wave Propagation
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines .
Course Description: Antennas and propagation effects play a crucial role in RF systems. In practice, the
design of a working system such as mobile phone networks, WIFI, RFID, Satellite communication and
GPS requires a good understanding of these components. This course teaches the fundamentals of antenna
and propagation and shows the application in practical examples. The course covers the theory of
radiation, fundamental antenna parameters and concepts, wire antennas such as dipoles and loop antennas,
antenna arrays, aperture antennas, microstrip antennas, numerical analysis, communication & radar
systems and propagation effects.

Course Objectives: The course objectives are:

1. To understand the concept of radiation, antenna definitions and significance of antenna parameters, to
derive and analyze the radiation characteristics of thin wire dipole antennas and solve numerical problems.
2. To analyse the characteristics and design relations of UHF, VHF and Microwave Antennas.
3. To identify the antenna array requirements, to determine the characteristics of ULAs and estimate the
patterns of BSA, EFA, and Binomial Arrays.
4. To understand the concepts and set-up requirements for microwave measurements, and familiarize with
the procedure to enable antenna measurements.
5. To define and distinguish between different phenomenon of wave propagation (ground wave, space
wave and sky wave), their frequency dependence, and estimate their characteristics, identifying their
profiles and parameters involved.

UNIT-I

Antenna Basics: Basic Antenna Parameters – Patterns, Beam Area, Radiation Intensity, Beam

Efficiency, Directivity-Gain-Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Effective Height. Fields from Oscillating

Dipole, Field Zones, Front - to-back Ratio, Antenna Theorems, Radiation ,Retarded Potentials–

HelmholtzTheorem

Thin Linear Wire Antennas – Radiation from Small Electric Dipole, Quarter Wave Monopole and Half

Wave Dipole – Current Distributions, Field Components, Radiated Power, Radiation Resistance, Beam

Width, Directivity, Effective Area and Effective Height, Natural Current Distributions, Far Fields and

Patterns of Thin Linear Centre-fed Antennas of Different Lengths. Loop Antennas.

108
UNIT-II

Antenna Arrays: Point Sources – Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic Sources - Different Cases,

Principle of Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside Arrays, End fire Arrays, EFA with

Increased Directivity, Derivation of their Characteristics and Comparison, BSAs with Non-uniform

Amplitude Distributions – General Considerations and Binomial Arrays.

UNIT-III

VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - I: Arrays with Parasitic Elements, Yagi-Uda Array, Folded Dipoles

and their Characteristics, Helical Antennas – Helical Geometry, Helix Modes, Practical Design

Considerations for Monofilar Helical Antenna in Axial and Normal Modes, Horn Antennas – Types,

Fermat’s Principle, Optimum Horns, Design Considerations of Pyramidal Horns.

UNIT-IV

VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - II: Microstrip Antennas – Introduction, Features, Advantages and

Limitations, Rectangular Patch Antennas – Geometry and Parameters, Characteristics of Microstrip

Antennas. Reflector Antennas – Introduction, Flat Sheet and Corner Reflectors, Paraboloidal Reflectors –

Geometry, Pattern Characteristics, Feed Methods, Reflector Types – Related Features.

UNIT-V

Ground Wave Propagation –Plane Earth Reflections, Space and Surface Waves, Wave Tilt, Curved Earth

Reflections. Space Wave Propagation –Field Strength Variation with Distance and Height, Effect of

Earth’s Curvature, Absorption, Super Refraction, M-Curves and Duct Propagation, Scattering phenomena,

Troposphere Propagation. Sky Wave Propagation –Structure of Ionosphere, Refraction and Reflection of

Sky Waves by Ionosphere, Ray Path, Critical Frequency, MUF, LUF, OF, Virtual Height and Skip

Distance, Relation between MUF and Skip Distance, Multi-hop Propagation.

109
 Text/Reference Books:

1. Antennas and Wave Propagation – J.D. Kraus, R.J. Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, TMH,
New Delhi, 4th ed., (Special Indian Edition), 2010.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, PHI, 2nd
edition,2000.
3. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Ed., 2005.
4.. Antennas and Wave Propagation – K.D. Prasad, Satya Prakashan, Tech India
Publications, New Delhi, 2001.

Course outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to

CO1: Understand the basic parameters of antenna (L1) and apply the concepts to various antennas based
on frequency, configuration and establish the radiation patterns of antenna arrays (L2)
CO2: Analysis of VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas (L3)
CO3: Design and analysis of microstrip antennas (L4)
CO4: To understand the wave propagation in different frequency ranges (L5)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO1 3 2 1 - 1 - 2 1 2 1 3 3 - -

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 3 3 - 1

CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 - 1

CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 - 1 1 2 3 - 1

110
 EC504C -DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

Digital Communications is a fundamental course in the stream of Electronics and

Communication Engineering. This course introduces the basic concepts and principles involving in

the analysis of a digital communication system including various Modulation techniques, concepts

involved at the Matched filter, ISI, Signal space analysis, various digital modulation techniques and

error detection and correction methods. All modern communication systems uses these concepts as

fundamentals to design, operate the same. This course helps students comprehend respective

Engineering competitive examinations such as GATE, IES etc.,

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the key modules of digital communication systems with emphasis on its modulation
techniques
2. To analyze Matched filter, Inter-symbol interference, correlative level coding concepts
3. To understand signal space analysis to understand geometric representation of signals
4. To Understand generation and detection of various digital modulation schemes
5. To get introduced to the concept and basics of information theory and Error detection and
correction codes.

UNIT I
Digital Coding of Analog Waveforms: Sampling, Quantization, Quantization noise, Encoding, Pulse
Code Modulation, Regeneration, Decoding & Filtering, Noise considerations in PCM systems, Time-
Division Multiplexing, Synchronization, Differential encoding, Delta Modulation, Differential Pulse
Code Modulation, Processing gain, Adaptive Delta Modulation,

UNIT II
Baseband Pulse Transmission: Matched filter and it’s Properties, Matched filter for rectangular
pulse, Error rate due to noise, Inter-symbol Interference, Nyquist’s criterion for distortion-less
baseband binary transmission, Duo binary, Modified duo binary in Correlative-level coding,
Baseband M-array PAM transmission, Eye patterns. .

UNIT III
Signal Space Analysis: Introduction, Geometric representation of signals, Gram-Schmidt
Orthogonalization procedure, Response of bank of correlators in noise, Coherent detection of signals
in noise, Correlation receiver, Probability of error.

111
 UNIT IV
Digital Modulation Techniques: Introduction, Pass band transmission model, ASK, Coherent Phase
Shift Keying – Binary phase shift keying, Quadrature shift keying, Binary Frequency shift keying, M-
array Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, Non-coherent orthogonal modulation schemes-Differential
PSK, Non-Coherent Binary FSK.
(Error probability, Generation and Detection, Power spectra, Bandwidth above schemes)

UNIT-V
Error Control Coding: Introduction, Examples of Error Control Coding, Methods of controlling
Errors, Types of Errors, Types of Codes. Linear Block Codes: Matrix Representation of Linear Block
Codes, Error Detection and Error Correctio Capabilities of Linear Block Codes. Convolution Codes:
Encoders for Convolution Codes, Decoders for Convolution Codes. Illustrative Problems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,” by John Wiley & Sons,3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley-India edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” Oxford Univ. press, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
2. J.S. Chithode, “Digital Communications”, Technical Publications, Ist Edition, 2020
3. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals & Noise
in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the Digital communication System and able to analyse the different Digital
modulation techniques.
2. Understand the concepts of baseband digital modulation schemes and Inter Symbol
Interference.
3. Analyze Signal space concepts, probability of error performance of various digital binary
modulation systems and are able to design digital communication systems.
4. Design a system with Error correcting codes by learning Block Codes, Cyclic Codes and
Convolutional Codes.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - - 1
CO3 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1
CO4 1 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - 1

112
 EC506L -Analog and Digital Communication Laboratory

Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks: 40 Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
This course gives students deep knowledge in Analog and Digital communication systems at the
practical level so that students can understand the logical, analytical, and mathematical
background of the communication system. This lab focuses on understanding the fundamental
concepts of signal flow in Analog and Digital communication system. The Detailed analysis of
AM, FM, Pulse modulations, digital modulation techniques, sampling and reconstruction, Data
Conditioning and Reconditioning are done. The course covers the basic types of Analog and
Digital modulation in both Simulink and equipment based.

Course Objectives
1. The course gives students deep knowledge in analog and digital communication
systems at the practical level.
2. The course aims to make the student familiar with Analog and Digital Modulation and
Demodulation techniques, transmission, reception etc.
3. The Course aims to write and simulate the MATLAB code to study the modulation
techniques.
4. The Couse enhance the understanding theory of Analog and Digital Communication
concepts.

Hands-on experiments related to the course contents ECPCT404.

List of Experiments:

1. Fourier Synthesis

2. AM Transmitter & Receiver

3. FM Transmitter & Receiver

4. AM/FM Radio Receiver

5. Analog signal sampling & Reconstruction

6. Generation & Detection of PAM/PWM/PPM

7. Generation & Detection of PCM

8. Generation & Detection of DM/SIGMA DELTA/ ADM

9. Baseband digital data transmission

10. Data conditioning & Reconditioning

11. Generation & Detection of BPSK/DPSK/DEPSK

113
 12. Simulation of digital modulation schemes

(i) Phase Shift Keying (PSK), differential phase shift keying (DPSK), DEPSK

(ii) QPSK, M-ary PSK, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
1. Generate AM and FM signals and evaluate their performance.
2. Perform signal sampling by determining the sampling rates for baseband signals and
reconstruct the signals.
3. Generate digital modulation signals for ASK, PSK and FSK and perform their
detection.
4. Simulate MSK, DPSK, QPSK and DEPSK schemes and estimate their BER.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 3 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 3

CO2 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 - - - 3 3

CO3 2 2 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 3

CO4 2 2 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 3

114
 EC507L Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory

Instruction : Hours/Week : 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks : 40 Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview: This course introduces the assembly language programming of 8085 and 8051

Microcontroller. It gives a practical training of interfacing the peripheral devices with the 8085

microprocessor/ 8051microcontroller. It is useful for developing students to be proficient in the

assembly language programming skills and real time applications of Microprocessor as well as

microcontroller.

Course Objectives: The purpose of the course is

1. To expose students to the operation of typical microprocessor (8085) and
microcontroller (8051) trainer kits.
2. To prepare the students to be able to solve different problems by developing different
programs.
3. To develop the building of Microcontroller based systems.

Hands-on experiments related to the course contents EC502C.

Pre-requisites: None

Every student is free to do his / her choice of experiments in the Laboratory. Student can do at least
10 to 12 experiments only.

List of Experiments:
(8085/8086 Microprocessor Assembly Language Programming)
1. Write a simple program for arithmetic operations – addition, subtraction, multiplication and
division of 16 – bit number.
2. Write a simple program for string operations like string concatenation, swapping.
3. Write a program for interfacing LCD with 8085 and display a message.
4. Write a program for interfacing Stepper Motor with 8085.
5. Write a program for flashing LEDs using 8253 /8254 (PIT) and interrupts.

(8051 Microcontroller Assembly Language Programming)

6. Write a program for performing simple arithmetic operations.
7. Write a program for performing simple Logical operations.
8. Write a simple program for flashing LEDs using software delays, timers and interrupts.
9. Write a program for interfacing Seven Segment Display / LCD with 8051 and display
messages.
10. Write a program for interfacing Keypad with 8051 and display keypad input on LCD.

115
 11. Write a program for square waveform generation, with different frequencies and duty
cycles.
12. Write a program for serial communication through UART using polling and interrupt
methods.
13. Write a program for interfacing ADC with 8051.
14. Write a program for Pulse Width Modulation using on-chip PWM and analog I/O modules.

Write a program for interfacing Seven Segment Display and/or LCD to ARM or 8086 processor.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
1. Write assembly language programmes for arithmetic and Logical operations using 8085 µp.
2. Develop assembly language programs / C and C++ programs using microcontrollers.
3. Write 8051 assembly language programs to control inbuilt timer and communication
modules.
4. Interface ADC and DAC modules with microprocessor-based systems and Write assembly
language programmes using ARM / 8086 processor.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 3 - - 2 - -

CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 - - 2 1 -

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 3 - - 2 - 1

CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - 1

116
 EC508L-Digital Signal Processing Lab

Instruction : Hours/Week : 0L:0T:2P Credits: 1

Sessional Marks : 40 Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
The course is to make familiar with practical implementation of the digital signal processing.
digital signal processing involving filtering, deconvolution, spectral estimation, and a variety of
other techniques. Laboratory work involves developing signal processing systems on a personal
computer and using them with both real and simulated data. Questions related to hardware
realizations are also considered. Students can able to develop DSP algorithms for convolution,
correlation, DFT, filtering of signals etc. Introduction to TMS Processors software and Hardware
tools.

Course Learning Objectives:

1. Understanding the mathematical operations on discrete signals
2. Can able to design Inverse DFT and FFT of a discrete time signals.
3. Model IIR and FIR filters using different techniques.
4. Implementing different DSP algorithms on TMS processors.

Part A – Using MATLAB

1. Generation of standard signals, periodic and Aperiodic signal

2. DFT and IDFT
3. FFT algorithms - Decimation in Time / Decimation in Frequency.
4. Linear and Circular Convolution in time domain and in frequency domain (using DFT)
5. Spectrum Analysis using DFT
6. IIR filter design
7. FIR filter design
8. Decimation and Interpolation
Part B – Using Code Composer Studio
9. Linear convolution of two sequences.
10. Circular convolution of two sequences.
11. Generation of Elementary signals.
12. MAC operation using various addressing modes
13. FIR Implementation.

Learning Resources

Text Books
1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles,
Algorithms and Applications, 4/e, Pearson Education, 2007.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, R. W. Schafer, Discrete-Time Signal Processing, 3/e, Prentice Hall
of India, 2009.

117
 Reference Books
1. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing - Lonnie C Ludeman, John Wiley & Sons, 2003
2. Digital Signal Processing “A – Computer Based Approach” - Sanjit K Mitra, Tata Mc
Graw Hill 2nd Edition, 2003
3. Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing - Lawrence R Rabiner & Bernard
Gold, Prentice Hall.
e- Resources & other digital material
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/
2. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~moussavi/dsp815/LectureNotes/index.html
3. http://www.ece.cmu.edu/~ee791
4. http://cobweb.ecn.purdue.edu/~ipollak/ee438/FALL04/notes/notes.html

Course Outcomes

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to

1. Interpret discrete-time signals using DFT
2. Apply FFT algorithms for various signal processing operations
3. Design the Multirate Filters
4. Design IIR and FIR digital filters for real time DSP applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO1 3 - - - - - - - 1 - - 3 - 1

CO2 3 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 -

CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - 1

CO4 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 2 - - - 2 - 1

118
 EC509S-WEB Design and Development

Instruction: Hours/Week: 2L:0T:0P Credits: 2

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description: This course offers a preliminary treatment of Web Design and Development

concepts that yield visible and audible results through web pages. The course includes an

introduction to the World Wide Web, industry standard browsers, effective site and page design,

HTML, XHTML, CSS, XML, web graphics and client-side scripting. The course includes detailed

discussion of design practices, such as the appropriate use of text and graphics, font and color

selection, meta-tags, navigation techniques, media formats, and methods of enhancing the user

experience.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the fundamentals of Internet, and the principles of web design.
2. To construct basic websites using HTML and Cascading Style Sheets.
3. To build dynamic web pages with validation using Java Script objects and by applying
different event handling mechanisms.
4. To develop modern interactive web applications using PHP, XML and MySQL.

Unit–I
Introduction: Concept of WWW, Internet and WWW, HTTP Protocol: Request and Response,
Web browser and Web servers, Features of latest version of Web.
Web Design: Concepts of effective web design, Web design issues including Browser, Bandwidth
and Cache, Display resolution, Look and Feel of the Website, Page Layout and linking, User centric
design, Sitemap, Planning and publishing website, Designing effective navigation.
Unit–II
HTML: Basics of HTML, formatting and fonts, commenting code, color, hyperlink, lists, tables,
images, forms, XHTML, Meta tags, Character entities, frames and frame sets, Browser architecture
and Web site structure. Overview and features of latest version of HTML.
Style sheets: Need for CSS, introduction to CSS, basic syntax and structure, using CSS,
background images, colors and properties, manipulating texts, using fonts, borders and boxes,
margins, padding lists, positioning using CSS, CSS2, Overview and features of latest version of
CSS.
Unit–III
JavaScript: Client-side scripting with JavaScript, variables, functions, conditions, loops and
repetition, Pop up boxes, Advance JavaScript: JavaScript and objects, JavaScript own objects, the
DOM and web browser environments, Manipulation using DOM, forms and validations.
DHTML: Combining HTML, CSS and JavaScript, Events and buttons.

119
 Unit–IV
XML: Introduction to XML, uses of XML, simple XML, XML key components, DTD and
Schemas, Using XML with application. Transforming XML using XSL and XSLT.
PHP: Introduction and basic syntax of PHP, decision and looping with examples, PHP and HTML,
Arrays, Functions, Browser control and detection, string, Form processing, Files, Advance
Features: Cookies and Sessions.
Unit–V

PHP and MySQL: Basic commands with PHP examples, Connection to server, creating database,

selecting a database, listing database, listing table names, creating a table, inserting data, altering

tables, queries, deleting database, deleting data and tables, PHP myadmin and database bugs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ralph Moseley and M. T. Savaliya, Developing Web Applications, Wiley-India Private
Limited, 2011.
2. Robert W.Sebesta, Programming the World Wide Web, 7th edition, Pearson Education,
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., Web Technologies Black Book, Dreamtech Press, 2009.
2. Joel Sklar, Principles of Web Design, Cengage Learning, 6th Edition, 2015.
3. B. M. Harwani, Developing Web Applications in PHP and AJAX, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010.
4. Internet and World Wide Web How to program, Paul J. Deitel, Harvey M. Deitel, and Abbey
Deitel, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the concepts of World Wide Web, and the requirements of effective web design.
2. Develop web pages using the HTML and CSS features with different layouts as per need of
applications.
3. Use the JavaScript to develop the dynamic web pages.
4. Construct simple web pages in PHP and to represent data in XML format and use server-side
scripting with PHP to generate the web pages dynamically using the database

connectivity.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PS01 PS02
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 - 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 1 - - -

CO3 2 2 1 - - 3 - - - - - 1 - 1

CO4 1 2 3 1 2 3 - - - - - - - -

120
 EC510A- Universal Human Values

Instruction: Hours/Week: 2L:0T:0P Credits: 0

Sessional Marks: 100 End Semester Examination Marks: 0

COURSE DESCRIPTION:
The methodology of this course is universally adaptable, involving a systematic and rational study of the human being
vis-à-vis the rest of existence. It is free from any dogma or value prescriptions. This process of self-exploration takes
the form of a dialogue between the teacher and the students to begin with and within the student himself/herself
finally.
Pre-requisites/co-requisites: None.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To develop a holistic perspective based on self-exploration about themselves (human being), family, society
and nature/existence.
2. To understand (or developing clarity) the harmony in the human being, family, society and nature/existence.
3. To strengthen self-reflection and to develop commitment and courage to act.
4. To understand social responsibility of an engineer.
5. To appreciate ethical dilemma while discharging duties in professional life.

UNIT I
Introduction - Need, Basic Guidelines, Content and Process for Value Education: Purpose and motivation for
the course, Self-Exploration–what is it? - Its content and process; ‘Natural Acceptance’ and Experiential Validation-
as the process for self-exploration. Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations. Right
understanding, Relationship and Physical Facility- the basic requirements for fulfilment of aspirations of every human
being with their correct priority. Understanding Happiness and Prosperity correctly - A critical appraisal of the current
scenario. Method to fulfil the above human aspirations: understanding and living in harmony at various levels.

UNIT II
Understanding Harmony in The Human Being - Harmony in Myself!:
Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material ‘Body’. Understanding the needs of
Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - happiness and physical facility(Sukh and Suvidha).Understanding the Body as an instrument
of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer).Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’.
Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam and Health; correct appraisal of Physical needs, meaning of
Prosperity in detail. Programs to ensure Sanyam and Health.

UNIT III
Understanding Harmony in The Family and Society- Harmony in Human-Human Relationship: Understanding
harmony in the Family - the basic unit of human interaction. Understanding values in human-human relationship;
meaning of Justice (nine universal values in relationships) and program for its fulfilment to ensure mutual
happiness(Ubhay-tripti); Trust(Vishwas) and Respect (Samman)as the foundational values of relationship.
Understanding the meaning of Trust; Difference between intention and competence. Understanding the meaning of
Respect, Difference between respect and differentiation; the other salient values in relationship. Understanding the
harmony in the society (society being an extension of family): Resolution (Samadhan), Prosperity(Samridhi),
fearlessness (Abhay) and co-existence as comprehensive Human Goals. Visualizing a universal harmonious order in
society- Undivided Society(AkhandSamaj), Universal Order(SarvabhaumVyawastha) - from family to world family.

UNIT IV
Understanding Harmony in The Nature and Existence - Whole Existence as Coexistence:
Understanding the harmony in the Nature. Interconnectedness and mutual fulfilment among the four orders of nature-
recyclability and self-regulation in nature. Understanding Existence as Co-existence of mutually interacting units in
all-pervasive space. Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence.

121
UNIT V
Implications of The Above Holistic Understanding of Harmony on Professional Ethics: Natural acceptance of
human values. Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct. Basis for Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution
and Humanistic Universal Order. Competence in professional ethics: a. Ability to utilize the professional competence
for augmenting universal human order b. Ability to identify the scope and characteristics of people friendly and eco-
friendly production systems, c. Ability to identify and develop appropriate technologies and management patterns for
above production systems. Case studies of typical holistic technologies, management models and production systems.
Strategy for transition from the present state to Universal Human Order: a. At the level of individual: as socially and
ecologically responsible engineers, technologists and managers b. At the level of society: as mutually enriching
institutions and organizations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Human Values and Professional Ethics by R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Jeevan Vidya: EkParichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amarkantak, 1999.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. E. F. Schumancher, 1973, Small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered. Blond & Briggs,
Britain.
2. N. Tripathy, 2003, Human Values, New Age International Publishers.
3. Ivan IIIich, 1974, Energy & Equity, The Trinity Press, Worcester, and HarperCollins, USA
4. A Nagraj, 1998 Jeevan Vidya ekParichay, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak.
5. Sussan George, 1976, How the Other Half Dies, Penguin Press, Reprinted 1986, 1991.
6. Subhas Palekar, 2000, How to practice Natural Farming, Pracheen(Vaidik) Krishi Tantra Shodh, Amravati.
7. E G Seebauer& Robert L.Berry, 2000, Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists & Engineers, Oxford University
Press.
8. M Govindrajan, S Natrajan& V. S Senthil kumar, Engineering Ethics (including Humna Values), Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Ltd.
9. The Story of My Experiments with Truth - by Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi.
10. India Wins Freedom - Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad.

Relevant CDs, Movies, Documentaries & Other Literature:

1. value Education website, http://www.uptu.ac.in
2. Story of Stuff, http://www.storyofstuff.com
3. AI Gore, An Inconvenient Truth, Paramount Classics, USA
4. Charle Chaplin, Modern Times, United Artists, USA
5. IIT Delhi, Modern Technology - the Untold Story.

COURSE OUTCOMES: On completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. To become more aware of themselves, and their surroundings (family, society, nature) and distinguish
between values and skills, happiness and accumulation of physical facilities, the Self and the Body,
Intention and Competence of an individual, etc.
2. Understand the role of a human being in ensuring harmony in society and nature.
3. To become sensitive to their commitment towards what they have understood (human values, human
relationship and human society) .
4. Distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and start working out the strategy to actualize a
harmonious environment wherever they work.

ASSESSMENT:
(i). Assessment by faculty mentor: 20 marks
(ii). Socially relevant project/Group Activities/Assignments: 20 marks
(iii). Semester End Examination: 60 marks

122
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO1 3 1 3 - - - 1 1 1 - 1 1 - -

CO2 3 - - 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - -

CO3 1 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - -

CO4 - 2 - - - 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 - -

123
 EC601C -Microwave Engineering
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Prerequisite: Antennas and Propagation
Course Description: The course will be broadly focusing on analysis, design and development of
microwave circuits and systems. The course will cover introduction to Microwaves, Microwave
transmission modes, Transmission lines, Impedance Matching, Microwave Network Analysis,
Directional Coupler, Power Divider, Microwave Filters, Microwave Attenuator, RF switches and
phase shifters, Microwave Amplifiers, Low Noise Amplifier, Microwave Mixers and Oscillators,
Microwave Antennas, Microwave Measurements, Microwave Systems.
Course Objectives:
1.To get familiarized with microwave frequency bands, their applications and to understand the
limitations and losses of conventional tubes at these frequencies.
2. To distinguish between different types of microwave tubes, their structures and principles of
microwave power generation.
3. To impart the knowledge of Scattering Matrix, its formulation and utility, and establish the
S-Matrix for various types of microwave junctions.
4. Understand the utility of Optical Fibres in Communications.

UNIT – I
Microwave Tubes: Limitations and Losses of conventional Tubes at Microwave frequencies,
Cavity Klystrons – Structure, Re-entrant Cavities, Velocity Modulation Process, Applegate
Diagram, Bunching Process and Small Signal Theory – Expressions for O/P Power and Efficiency.
Reflex Klystrons – Structure, Velocity Modulation and Applegate Diagram, Mathematical Theory
of Bunching, Power Output, Efficiency, Oscillating Modes and O/P Characteristics. Helix TWTs:
Types and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT and Amplification Process
(qualitative treatment), Suppression of Oscillations, Gain Considerations.

UNIT - II
M-Type Tubes: Introduction, Cross-field Effects, Magnetrons – Different Types, Cylindrical
Traveling Wave Magnetron – Hull Cut-off and Hartree Conditions, Modes of Resonance and PI-
Mode Operation, Separation of PI-Mode, o/p characteristics,
Microwave Solid State Devices: Introduction, Classification, Applications. Gunn Diodes –
Principle, RWH Theory, Characteristics, Modes of Operation - Gunn Oscillation Modes, Principle
of operation of IMPATT and TRAPATT Devices.

UNIT - III
Waveguide Components: Coupling Mechanisms – Probe, Loop, Aperture types. Waveguide
Discontinuities – Waveguide Windows, Tuning Screws and Posts, Matched Loads. Waveguide
Attenuators – Different Types, Resistive Card and Rotary Vane Attenuators; Waveguide Phase
Shifters – Types, Dielectric and Rotary Vane Phase Shifters, Waveguide Multiport Junctions - E
plane and H plane Tees. Ferrites– Composition and Characteristics, Faraday Rotation, Ferrite
Components – Gyrator, Isolator.

UNIT – IV
Scattering matrix: Importance of S-matrix, Scattering Matrix Properties, Directional Couplers –

124
 2 Hole, Bethe Hole S Parameters, [s] matrix of Magic Tee and Circulator, Measurement of S-
parameters.
MICs : Advantages of MIC’s, Hybrid MIC’s, Strip lines and microstrip lines, Monolithic MICs

UNIT V
Microwave Measurements: Description of Microwave Bench – Different Blocks and their Features,
Errors and Precautions, Measurement of Attenuation, Frequency. Standing Wave Measurements,
Measurement of Low and High VSWR., Cavity Q-factor and Impedance Measurements. Antenna
gain measurements.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits – Samuel Y. Liao, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2003.
2. Electronic Communications Systems- Wayne Tomasi, Pearson, 5th Edition
3. Microwave Engineering - David M. Pozar, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd., 1989, 3r ed.,
2011 4t. 4. Microwave Engineering - G.S. Raghuvanshi, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd.,
2012
5.Microwave and Radar Engineering, Kulkarni, Umesh publications, 1998.
6. Microwave Engineering, Annapurna Das and Sisir K.Das, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2000.
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will have the ability to
1. Known power generation at microwave frequencies and derive the performance
characteristics. (L2)
2. Understand the principles of solid-state devices. (L1)
3. Distinguish between the different types of waveguide and ferrite components, and select
proper components for engineering applications (L4)
4. Understand the utility of S-parameters in microwave component design (L3) and to know the
measurement procedure of various microwave parameters. (L5)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 - -

CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 -

CO3 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 - -

CO4 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3 - 1

125
 EC602C-Computer Networks
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
Computer Networks plays a vital role in the era of communication systems in resources sharing
applications. The aim of this course is to introduce the concepts of Computer networking and its
applications.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the basic concepts of computer networks and internet
2. To gain knowledge about the design issues of link layer and internet layer
3. To gain knowledge about the concept of connection oriented and connection less Protocols.
4. To gain knowledge in developing different applications.
Unit -1
Introduction to Computer Networks and the Internet: Principles of network applications and Internet
Challenges &Layering concepts.
OSI Reference Model & TCP/IP Reference Model.

Unit -2
DATA Link layer: ALOHA, Multiple access protocols, IEEE 802 standards, Local Area
Networks, Ethernet, Wireless LAN, Flow Control, Error Detection and Error Correction.

Unit-3
Internet Layer:
IP Addressing, IP Protocol, Routing Algorithms, queuing disciplines. Congestion Control
Algorithms, Resource Reservation, Admission Control and Differentiated services.

Unit-4
Transport Layer: User Datagram Protocol, Connection oriented transport protocol– Transmission
Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Port Addressing and Socket Programming.

Unit-5.
Application layer: The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, File transfer, Electronic mail,
Domain name system, Peer-to-Peer file sharing, JPEG, MPEG. Network Security: DES & RSA.

Text / Reference books:

1. J.F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, “Computer Networking – A top-down approach Pearson
Education, 5th Edition
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall India Fourth Edition.
3. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition
4. D. Comer, “Computer Networks and Internet/TCP-IP”, Prentice Hall
5. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice.

126
 Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Design of computer networks in Internet.
2. Understand the concepts of error handling, flow control IP Addressing and Routing.
3. Understand the concept of TCP and UDP protocols.
4. Develop several protocols foe web Applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO1 PS01 PS02

CO/PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 _ 3 3 -- 1
CO1
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 _ - 1
CO2
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 _ - 1
CO3
3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 _ 3 _ - 1
CO4

127
 EC607L- Microwave Engineering Lab

Instruction : Hours/Week : 0L:0T:2P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks : 40 Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
Electromagnetic waves and Microwave Lab will provide practical understanding on Microwave Bench
setup such as Reflex Klystron and operation of various components of the same, Gunn diode and their
characteristics. This course also ensures to have practical exposure on Antenna parameters
measurements and simulation of the same & optical devices and it's characteristics.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand Microwave Bench setups
2. To analyze various parameters of microwave measurements
3. To understand Antenna measurements
4. To understand the characteristics of optical fiber devices.

List of Experiments:
1. Reflex klystron characteristics – I
2. Reflex klystron characteristics – II
3. Gunn diode Oscillator
4. Waveguide parameters
5. VSWR measurements
6. Directional Couplers
7. Attenuation Measurement
8. Impedance Measurement
9. Dipole Antenna Simulation using IE3D software
10. Antenna measurements

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Able to measure the performance of simple microwave circuits and devices.
2. Perform microwave measurements with sophistical instruments such as vector network
analyser and spectrum analyzer.
3. Able to assess the performance of optical devices such as Light sources, fibers and detectors.
4. Able to plot the loss characteristics of optical fibers.

128
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - -

CO2 1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - -

CO3 1 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 - -

CO4 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 - -

129
 EC608L- COMPUTER NETWORKS LAB

Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:0T:3P Credits: 1.5

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Prerequisites: Nil

Course Over view: This course is designed to impart knowledge about detailed knowledge of

Computer Networks, various protocols used in Communication, Managing and configuring Cisco

Switches and Routers, and various WAN technologies. Learn basic concepts of computer

networking and acquire practical notions of protocols with the emphasis on TCP/IP.

Course Objectives: A lab provides a practical approach to Ethernet/Internet networking: Networks

are assembled, and experiments are made to understand the layered architecture and how to do

some important protocols work.

1. Explain network technologies and how devices access local and remote networks.
2. Explain how switching operates in a small to a medium-sized business network.
3. Design an IPv4 and IPv6 addressing scheme to provide network connectivity for a small to a
medium-sized business network.
4. Implement basic network connectivity between devices.
Major Equipment Required: Required software (Open Source) like NS-2, NSG-2.1 and Wire
SHARK
Note:
(a). Minimum of 12 Experiments have to be conducted
(b). All the Experiments may be Conducted using Network Simulation software like NS-2,
NSG-2.1 and Wire SHARK/equivalent software.

For Experiments 2 to 10 Performance may be evaluated through simulation by using the

parameters Throughput, Packet Delivery Ratio, Delay etc.

List of Experiments:
1. LAN Configuration.
2. IP Addressing.
3. Error Correction and Error Detection.
4. Routing Algorithms
5. FCFS and SJF algorithms
6. Round Robin Algorithm.
7. Peer to peer file sharing and Socket Programming

130
 8. RSA algorithm.
9. DNS look up tables
10. HTML Design.
11. HTTP.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the students will be able to

1. Understand network technologies and to access local and remote networks.

2. Operate switching in a small to a medium-sized business network.

3. Design an IPv4 and IPv6 addressing scheme to provide network connectivity for a small

to a medium-sized business network.

4. Implement basic network connectivity between devices.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PS01 PS02
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 3 - - 2 - 1

CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 - - 2 - 1

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 3 - - 2 - 1

CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - -

131
 EC609S- Internet of Things and Its Applications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 0L:1T:2P Credits: 2

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
Internet of Things (IoT) cuts across different application domain verticals ranging from civilian to
defense sectors. These domains include agriculture, space, healthcare, manufacturing, construction,
water, and mining, which are presently transitioning their legacy infrastructure to support a lot.
Today it is possible to envision pervasive connectivity, storage, and computation, which, in turn,
gives rise to building different lot solutions. IoT-based applications such as innovative shopping
systems, infrastructure management in both urban and rural areas, remote health monitoring and
emergency notification systems, and transportation systems, are gradually relying on IoT-based
systems. Therefore, it is very important to learn the fundamentals of this emerging technology.
Course Learning Objectives:
The Internet is evolving to connect people to physical things and also physical things to other
physical things all in real time. It’s becoming the Internet of Things (IoT). The course enables
student:
1. To understand the fundamentals of Internet of things and protocols.
2. It introduces some of the application areas where Internet of Things can be applied.
3. To build a small low-cost embedded system using Arduino / Raspberry Pi or equivalent boards.
4. To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real-world scenario.
UNIT I:
Fundamentals of IoT: Introduction to IoT – Characteristics, Sensing, Actuation, Physical Design -
Protocols – Logical Design – Enabling technologies – IoT Levels – Six Levels of IoT - Domain
Specific IoTs.

UNIT II:
IOT and M2M: M2M, IoT vs M2M, Introduction to Raspberry Pi, Implementation of IoT with
Raspberry Pi, Introduction to SDN, SDN and NFV for IoT, IOT system Management with
NETCONF-YANG.

UNIT III:
IoT Design Methodology: IoT Systems Management – IoT Design Methodology – Specifications
Integration and Application Development. Introduction to Arduino Programming, Integration of
Sensors and Actuators with Arduino.

UNIT IV:
Data Analytics for IoT: Apache Hadoop, Using Hadoop MapReduce for Batch Data Analysis,
Apache Oozie, Apache Spark, Apache Storm, Using Apache Storm for Real-time Data Analysis.

132
 UNIT V:
Tools for IoT: Chef, Puppet, IOT code generator Case studies: Chef. Puppet – Multi-tier
Deployment, NETCONF-YANG.
IOT Applications: IoT applications for industry- Future Factory Concepts, Smart Applications,
Smart Cities and Smart Homes. Case Study: Agriculture, Healthcare, Activity Monitoring. Study of
existing IoT platforms /middleware, IoT- A, Hydra etc.
Text Book & References:
1. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A Hands-on Approach”, Universities
Press, 2015.
2. Chef, Puppet, IOT code generator Case studies: Chef. Puppet – Multi-tier Deployment,
NETCONF-YANG, Raspberry Pi.
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key applications
and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012.
4. Simon Monk, “Programming the Raspberry Pi: Getting Started with Python”, McGrawHill,
2013
5. Marco Schwartz, “Internet of Things with the Arduino Yun”, Pack Publishing, 2014.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Design a portable IoT using Arduino/ equivalent boards and relevant protocols.
2. Develop web services to access/control IoT devices.
3. Deploy an IoT application and connect to the cloud.
4. Analyze applications of IoT in real-time scenario.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PS01 PS02
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 2 3 - 1 1 - - - - - - 2 1 -

CO2 - - 3 2 1 - - - - - - 2 1 -

CO3 - 2 - 3 1 - - - - - - 2 -- 1

CO4 - - - - 1 3 3 3 - - - 1

133
 EC610A- Professional Ethics in Engineering
Instruction: Hours/Week:2L:0T:0P Credits: 0
Sessional Marks: 100 End Semester Examination Marks: 0
COURSE DESCRIPTION:
This course is designed to introduce engineering students to the concepts of engineering ethics. It
will allow students to explore the relationship between ethics and engineering and apply classical
moral theory and decision making to engineering issues encountered in academic and professional
careers. It mainly focuses on improving the capacities of leadership /management through training
in professional ethics. Codes of ethics have been invoked as a basis for professional engineering
licensure. Violations of such ethical codes have led to many well-known tragic engineering failures
that endangered human life and jeopardized public welfare. This discipline will doubtless take its
place alongside such well-established fields as medical ethics, business ethics, and legal ethics.
Pre-requisites/co-requisites: None.

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

1. To create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values.
2. To instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
3. To study the moral issues and decisions confronting individuals and organizations
engaged in engineering profession.
4. To study the related issues about the moral ideals, character, policies, and
relationships of people and corporations involved in technological activity.

UNIT I
Human Values: Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic
virtue – Respect for others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing
time – Cooperation –Commitment – Empathy – Self-confidence – Character – Spirituality –
Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional excellence and stress management.

UNIT II
Engineering Ethics: Senses of Engineering Ethics – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry –
Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and
Controversy –Models of professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs
and Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories.

UNIT III
Engineering as Social Experimentation: Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as
responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced Outlook on Law.

UNIT-IV
Safety, Responsibilities and Rights: Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk
Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining –
Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee
Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
Discrimination.

134
 UNIT V
Global Issues: Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer
Ethics - Role in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers –
Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral
Leadership – Sample Code of Conduct– Corporate Social Responsibility.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey,2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi,2003.
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2013.

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Discuss the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in
the society.
2. Learn the moral issues and problems in engineering; find the solution to those
problems.
3. Learn the need for professional ethics, codes of ethics and roles, concept of safety, risk
assessment.
4. Gain exposure to Environment Ethics & computer ethics; know their responsibilities and
rights.
Grading/Assessment:
(i). Attendance: 20 marks
(ii). Group Activities/Assignments: 20 marks
(iii). Semester End Examination: 60 marks

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PS01 PS02
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 2 1 - 1 2 - 1 1 - - 2 - -
CO2 3 3 2 - 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -
CO3 2 2 3 - 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -
CO4 3 2 3 - 1 3 3 - 1 - - 1 - -

135
FOURTH YEAR
SYLLABUS

136
 EC701C -Digital Image and Video Processing

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
In this course you will learn the basic principles and tools used to process images and videos,
and how to apply them in solving practical problems. Digital images and videos are everywhere these
days – in thousands of scientific, consumer, industrial, and creative applications. Which are obtained
from a wide range of the electromagnetic spectrum - from visible light and infrared to gamma rays
and beyond. The ability to process image and video signals is therefore an incredibly important skill
to master for engineering/science students, software developers, and practicing scientists. Digital
image and video processing continues to enable the multimedia technology revolution we are
experiencing today.
This course will strengthen fundamental knowledge about digital image and video processing
techniques along with mathematical framework to describe and analyze images and videos. Digital
image and video processing is used in almost all engineering fields and wide range of applications in
industrial automation, medical, agriculture, security, entertainment, education and many more.

Course Objectives:
The student should be made to:
1. To know the concept of image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image
Processing
2.To study the image enhancement and segmentation techniques
3.To learn about different color models and image compression procedures
4.To understand fundamentals of Video Coding
UNIT-1:
Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of visual perception, image sensing and acquisition, image
sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels – neighborhood, adjacency,
connectivity, distance measures.
Image Transforms: Need for image transforms, Fourier transform, 2-D Discrete Fourier transform and
its properties, Walsh Transform, Hadamard Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform.

UNIT –II
Image Enhancements and Filtering: Gray level transformations, histogram equalization and
specifications, pixel-domain smoothing filters – linear and order-statistics, pixel-domain.
Sharpening filters: first and second derivative, frequency domain filters – low-pass and high-pass
filters.
Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, edge linking and boundary detection, thresholding
–global and adaptive, region-based segmentation.

UNIT –III
Image Compression: Image compression fundamentals - Coding Redundancy, Spatial and Temporal
redundancy, Compression models: Lossy & Lossless, Shannon Fano coding, Huffman coding, Bit
plane coding, Transform coding, Predictive coding, Lossy Predictive coding, JPEG Standards.

137
 UNIT –IV
Color Image Processing: Color models– RGB, YUV, HSI; Color transformations– formulation, color
complements.
Video Processing: Video Formation, Perception and Representation, Video capture and display,
Analog video raster, Analog color television systems, Digital video.

UNIT –V
Fundamentals of Video Coding: Inter-frame redundancy, motion estimation techniques – full search,
fast search strategies, forward and backward motion prediction, frame classification – I, P and B;
Video sequence hierarchy – Group of pictures, frames, slices, macro-blocks and blocks; Elements of
a video encoder and decoder; Video coding standards – MPEG and H.26X.
Video Segmentation: Temporal segmentation–shot boundary detection, hard-cuts and soft-cuts.

Text/ Reference Books:

1. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Second Edition, Pearson Education
3rd edition 2008.
2. Anil Kumar Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall of India.2nd edition
2004.
3. Murat Tekalp , Digital Video Processing" Prentice Hall, 2nd edition 2015.
4. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan and T.VeeraKumar, “Digital Image processing, Tata Mc Graw Hill
publishers, 2009 .
5. Yao Wang,Jorn Ostermann and Ya Qin Zhang “Video processing and Communications”
Prentice Hall Publishers, 2002, ISBN 0-13-017547-1.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:
1. Mathematically represent the various types of images and analyze them.
2. Process these images for the enhancement of certain properties or for optimized use of the
resources.
3. Develop algorithms for image compression and coding.
4. Apply basic operations on video and estimate the motion of two-dimensional video.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - 3 2 - -
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - 3 1 - -
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 2 - - - - 3 3 2 -
CO4 2 2 2 1 1 2 - - - - 3 3 2 -

138
 EC707S-Machine learning and its Applications.

Instruction: Hours/Week: 2L:0T:0P Credits: 2

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description:
This course provides an introduction to the fundamental methods at the core of modern machine
learning. It covers theoretical foundations as well as essential algorithms for supervised and
unsupervised learning. Classes on theoretical and algorithmic aspects are complemented by
practical lab sessions.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn the concept of how to learn patterns and concepts from data without being
explicitly programmed in various IOT nodes.
2. To design and analyze various machine learning algorithms and techniques with a modern
outlook focusing on recent advances.
3. Explore supervised and unsupervised learning paradigms of machine learning.
4. To explore Deep learning technique and various feature extraction strategies.

Unit 1:
Supervised Learning (Regression/Classification) Basic methods: Distance-based methods,
Nearest-Neighbours, Decision Trees, Naive Bayes. Linear models: Linear Regression, Logistic
Regression, Generalized Linear Models, Support Vector Machines, Nonlinearity and Kernel
Methods. Beyond Binary Classification: Multi-class/Structured Outputs, Ranking.

Unit 2
Unsupervised Learning -Clustering: K-means/Kernel K-means , Dimensionality Reduction: PCA
and kernel PCA, Matrix Factorization and Matrix Completion Generative Models (mixture models
and latent factor models).

Unit 3
Evaluating Machine Learning algorithms and Model Selection, Introduction to Statistical Learning
Theory, Ensemble Methods (Boosting, Bagging, Random Forests.)

Unit 4
Sparse Modeling and Estimation, Modeling Sequence/Time-Series Data, Deep Learning and
Feature Representation Learning.

Unit 5
Scalable Machine Learning (Online and Distributed Learning) A selection from some other
advanced topics, e.g., Semi-supervised Learning, Active Learning, Reinforcement Learning,
Inference in Graphical Models, Introduction to Bayesian Learning and Inference Recent trends in
various learning techniques of machine learning and classification methods for IOT applications,
Various models for IOT applications.

139
 Text / References Books:
1. Kevin Murphy, Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective, MIT Press, 2012.
2. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, The Elements of Statistical Learning,
Springer 2009 (freely available online)
3. Christopher Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer, 2007.
Course Outcomes: After completion of course, students would be able to:
1. Understand the mathematical and statistical prospective of machine learning algorithms
through python programming.
2. Design and evaluate the unsupervised models through python in built functions.
3. Evaluate the machine learning models pre-processed through various feature engineering
algorithms by python programming.
4. Design and apply various reinforcement algorithms to solve real time complex problems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 2 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - 2 - 1

CO2 2 1 2 - - - - - 2 1 - 2 2 -

CO3 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 1 - 2 2 -

CO4 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 - 2 - -

140
 B.Tech. (R20)

EC603C --Program Elective-I

S. No. Name of the Program Elective
1. CMOS VLSI Design
2. Information Theory and Coding
3. Optimization Techniques
4. Hardware-Software Co-design

141
 EC603C- CMOS VLSI Design

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
This is an introductory course that covers basic theories and techniques of digital VLSI design in
CMOS technology. In this course, we will study the fundamental concepts and structures of
designing digital VLSI systems including CMOS devices and circuits, standard CMOS
fabrication processes, CMOS design rules, static and dynamic logic structures, interconnect
analysis, CMOS chip layout, simulation and testing, low power techniques, design tools and
methodologies, VLSI architecture.

Prerequisite Courses: Electronic Devices, Analog Circuits and Digital Logic Design
Course Learning Objectives:
1. To learn basic CMOS Circuits.
2. To learn CMOS process technology.
3. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices.
4. To learn the concepts of designing VLSI Subsystems.
Unit -1
Integrated circuit fabrication process: oxidation, diffusion, ion implantation, photolithography
and twin-tub CMOS process.
Brief Introduction to MOS, PMOS, NMOS, CMOS & BiCMOS technologies. Review of MOS
transistor models, Non-ideal behaviour of the MOS Transistor, Ids – Vds relationships, MOS
transistor threshold Voltage, Transistor as a switch, Inverter characteristics.
Unit -2
Integrated Circuit Layout: VLSI Design Flow, MOS Layers, Stick Diagrams, Design Rules
and Layout, CMOS Design rules for wires, Contacts and Transistors Layout Diagrams for CMOS
Inverters and Gates, Scaling of MOS circuits.
Basic Circuit Concepts: Sheet Resistance Rs and its concepts to MOS, Area Capacitance
calculations, Inverter Delays, driving large Capacitive Loads, Wiring Capacitances. Delay: RC
Delay model, linear delay model, logical path efforts. Power, interconnect and Robustness in
CMOS circuit layout.
Unit -3
Combinational Circuit Design: CMOS logic families including static, dynamic and dual rail
logic, Switch logic, Alternate gate circuits. Shifters, Adders, Parity generators, Comparators,
Zero/One Detectors, Binary Counters, ALUs, Multipliers, Counters, High Density Memory
Elements.
Unit -4
Sequential Circuit Design: Static Circuits, Design of latches and Flip-flops.
Test and Testability: Fault-modeling and simulation, test generation, design for testability,
Built-in-self-test.

142
 Unit -5
Physical Design: Floor-Planning, Placement, routing, Power delay estimation, Clock and Power
routing.

Design styles: Full-custom, Standard Cells, Gate-arrays, FPGAs, CPLDs and Design Approach

for Full-custom and Semi-custom devices.

Text/Reference Books:
1. Neil H.E. Weste and David Money Harris, CMOS VLSI design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective, 4th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2015.
2. Kamran Eshraghian, Eshraghian Douglas and A. Pucknell, Essentials of VLSI circuits and
systems, PHI, 2005 Edition.
3. John M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2016.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Learn CMOS process technology.
2. Analyze and implement various CMOS static logic circuits using Lambda based design
rules.
3. Design different CMOS circuits using various logic families along with their circuit
layouts for subsystem design.
4. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices and use HDL tools for
designing VLSI Subsystems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PS01 PS02
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1

CO3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - -

CO4 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -

143
 EC603C-INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
Information is the source of a communication system, whether it is analog or
digital. Information theory is a mathematical approach to the study of coding of information
along with the quantification, storage, and communication of information. With the
increasing importance in the field of digital communications, the information theory
emphasizes basic aspects such as discrete modulation techniques and coding theory. The
purpose of this course is to introduce various concepts in information theory, error detection
and correction codes. various fundamental concepts of encoding algorithms.
Course Objectives:
The student should be made to:
1.Be familiar with the concept of amount of information, entropy, channel capacity
2.To know the different communication channels, channel capacity and relation among
them.
3. To understand and analyze the various error-detection and error-correction codes
4. To know the design concepts of cyclic codes, convolution codes.
UNIT I
Information Theory: Introduction, Measure of information, Information content of
message, Average Information content of symbols in Long Independent sequences, Average
Information content of symbols in Long dependent sequences, Markov Statistical Model of
Information Sources, Entropy and Information rate of Markoff Sources

UNIT II:
Source Coding: Source coding theorem, Prefix Codes, Kraft McMillan Inequality property
– KMI
Encoding of the Source Output, Shannon’s Encoding Algorithm. Shannon Fano Encoding
Algorithm, Huffman codes, Extended Huffman coding, Arithmetic Coding, Lempel – Ziv
Algorithm.

UNIT III
Information Channels: Communication Channels, Channel Models, Channel Matrix, Joint
probability Matrix, Binary Symmetric Channel, System Entropies, Mutual Information,
Channel Capacity, Channel Capacity of: Binary Symmetric Channel, Binary Erasure
Channel, Muroga,s Theorem, Continuous Channels

UNIT IV
Error Control Coding: Introduction, Examples of Error control coding, methods of
Controlling Errors, Types of Errors, types of Codes, Linear Block Codes: matrix description

144
 of Linear Block Codes, Error Detection and Error Correction Capabilities of Linear Block
Codes, Single Error Correcting Hamming Codes, LDPC CODES
Binary Cyclic Codes: Algebraic Structure of Cyclic Codes, Encoding using an (n-k) Bit
Shift register, Syndrome Calculation, Error Detection and Correction

UNIT V
Cyclic Codes: Golay Codes, BCH Codes.
Convolution Codes: Convolution Encoder, Time domain approach, Transform domain
approach, Code Tree, Trellis and State Diagram, The Viterbi Algorithm, TURBO CODES .

Text Books:
1. Digital and analog communication systems, K. Sam Shanmugam, John Wiley
1. India Pvt. Ltd, 1996.
2. Digital communication, Simon Haykin, John Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2008.
3. Information Theory and Coding, Muralidhar Kulkarni, K.S. Shivaprakasha,
WileyIndia Pvt. Ltd, 2015, ISBN:978-81-265-5305-1.
Reference Books:
1. ITC and Cryptography, Ranjan Bose, TMH, II edition, 2007
2. Principles of digital communication, J. Das, S. K. Mullick, P. K. Chatterjee,
Wiley, 1986 - Technology & Engineering
3. Digital Communications – Fundamentals and Applications, Bernard Sklar,
Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2016, ISBN: 9780134724058.
4. Information Theory and Coding, K.N.Haribhat, D.Ganesh Rao,
CengageLearning, 2017.

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Describe basic parameters of Information, the concepts of source coding techniques,
and Error Control coding techniques)
2. Apply knowledge of Information theory and error control coding techniques to solve
problems
3. Analyze various source coding and channel coding techniques for error detection
and error correction in the information bearing signals
4. Analyze and compare audio and video coding techniques

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -

CO2 3 - 3 1 1 - - - - 2 - - -

CO3 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3

145
 EC603C-Optimization Techniques
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
The students will try to learn the operation research models using optimization techniques
based upon the fundamentals of engineering mathematics (minimization and Maximization
of objective function). The problem formulation by using linear, dynamic programming,
game theory and queuing models.

Course Objectives:
1. Operation research models using optimization techniques based upon the
fundamentals of engineering mathematics (minimization and Maximization of
objective function).
2. The problem formulation by using linear, dynamic programming, game theory and
queuing models.
3. The stochastic models for discrete and continuous variables to control inventory
and simulation of manufacturing models for the production decision making.
4. Formulation of mathematical models for quantitative analysis of managerial
problems in industry.
Unit 1
Introduction to Classical Methods & Linear Programming Problems Terminology, Design
Variables, Constraints, Objective Function, Problem Formulation. Calculus method, Kuhn
Tucker conditions, Method of Multipliers.

Unit 2
Linear Programming Problem, Simplex method, Two-phase method, Big-M method, duality,
Integer linear Programming, Dynamic Programming, Sensitivity analysis.

Unit 3
Single Variable Optimization Problems: Optimality Criterion, Bracketing Methods, Region
Elimination Methods, Interval Halving Method, Fibonacci Search Method, Golden Section
Method. Gradient Based Methods: Newton-Raphson Method, Bisection Method, Secant
Method, Cubic search method.

Unit 4
Multi Variable and Constrained Optimization Technique, Optimality criteria , Direct search
Method, Simplex search methods, Hooke-Jeeve‘s pattern search method, Powell‘s conjugate
direction method, Gradient based method, Cauchy‘s Steepest descent method, Newton‘s
method , Conjugate gradient method. Kuhn - Tucker conditions, Penalty Function, Concept
of Lagrangian multiplier, Complex search method, Random search method

Unit 5
Intelligent Optimization Techniques: Introduction to Intelligent Optimization, Soft
Computing, Genetic Algorithm: Types of reproduction operators, crossover & mutation,

146
 Simulated Annealing Algorithm, Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) - Graph Grammer
Approach - Example Problems
Genetic Programming (GP): Principles of genetic programming, terminal sets, functional
sets, differences between GA & GP, random population generation, solving differential
equations using GP.

Textbooks and References:

1. S. S. Rao, “Engineering Optimisation: Theory and Practice”, Wiley, 2008.
2. K. Deb, “Optimization for Engineering design algorithms and Examples”, Prentice
Hall, 2005.
3. C.J. Ray, “Optimum Design of Mechanical Elements”, Wiley, 2007.
4. R. Saravanan, “Manufacturing Optimization through Intelligent Techniques, Taylor
& Francis Publications, 2006.
5. D. E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine
learning”, Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing, 1989.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
1. Understand importance of optimization.
2. Ability to go in research by applying optimization techniques in problems of
Engineering and Technology.
3. Apply basic concepts of mathematics to formulate an optimization problem .
4. Analyze and appreciate variety of performance measures for various
optimization problems .

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -

CO2 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 -

CO3 1 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 -

CO4 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1 1

147
 EC603C-Hardware-Software Co-design
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:

This course will cover the fundamental topics of HW/SW code design and partitioning

concepts in designing embedded systems. The emphasis will be on goals and methodology

for partitioning hardware/software in embedded systems.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide an understanding of system-level design of embedded systems comprised
of both hardware and software.
2. To investigate topics such as Hardware Software partitioning, mapping and
scheduling, Co-simulation, synthesis and verification relevant to co-design.
3. To explore, analysis and optimization processes in support of algorithmic and
architectural design decisions.
4. Gain design experience with case studies using contemporary high-level methods and
tools.

UNIT I
NATURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
Hardware, Software, Definition of Hardware/Software Co-Design – Driving factors Platform
design space – Application mapping – Dualism of Hardware design and software design –
Concurrency andparallelism, Data flow modeling and Transformation – Data Flow Graph –
Tokens, actors and queues,Firing rates, firing rules and Schedules – Synchronous data flow
graph – control flow modeling – Adding time and resources – Transformations.

UNIT II
DATA FLOW IMPLEMENTATION IN SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE
Software Implementation of Data Flow – Converting queues and actors into software, Dynamic
Scheduler – Hardware Implementation of Data Flow – single rate SDF graphs into hardware,
Pipelining – Analysis of control flow and data flow – construction of control and data flow
graph – Translating C into hardware – Designing data path and controller.

UNIT III
DESIGN SPACE OF CUSTOM ARCHITECTURES
Finite state machines with data path – FSMD design example, Limitations – Micro programmed
Architecture – Micro programmed control, microinstruction encoding, Micro programmed data
path, micro programmed machine – General purpose Embedded Core – RISC pipeline, Program
organization SoC interfaces for custom hardware – Design Principles in SoC Architecture.

148
 UNIT IV
HARDWARE/ SOFTWARE INTERFACES
Principles of Hardware/software communication – synchronization schemes, communication
constrained versus Computation constrained, Tight and Loose coupling - On-chip buses –
Memory mapped interfaces – coprocessor interfaces – custom instruction interfaces –
Coprocessor hardware interface – Data and control design, programmer’s model.

UNIT V
CASE STUDIES Trivium Cripto coprocessor – Trivium stream cipher algorithm, Trivium for
8-bit platforms – AES coprocessor, CORDIC coprocessor – algorithm and implementation.

Text Books and References:

1. Ralf Niemann, “Hardware/Software Co-Design for Data Flow Dominated Embedded
Systems”,
Kluwer Academic Pub, 1998.
2. Jorgen Staunstrup, Wayne Wolf, ”Hardware/Software Co-Design: Principles and
Practice” , KluwerAcademic Pub, 1997.
3. Giovanni De Micheli, Rolf Ernst Morgon, ”Reading in Hardware/Software Co-
Design“ Kaufmann Publishers, 2001.
4. Patrick Schaumont, A Practical Introduction to Hardware/Software Codesign, 2nd
Edition, Springer.

Course Outcomes: After completion of this course the students will be able to
1. Analyze and apply design methodologies.
2. Appreciate the fundamental building blocks of the using hardware and software co-
design and
3. Relate implementation and testing environments and techniques and their
interrelationships.
4. Get familiar with modern hardware/software tools for building prototypes and to be
able to
demonstrate practical competence in these areas

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 1 1 2

CO2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - - - 3 1

CO3 - 1 3 - 1 - 1 - 3 1 1 1 - -

CO4 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 - 1 1 - - - 3

149
 B.Tech. (R20)

EC604C-Program Elective-II

S. No. Name of the Program Elective

1. Cyber Security

2. Nano Electronics

3. Sensors and Transducers

4. Electronic Instrumentation

150
 EC604C-Cyber Security
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
The course deals with the underlying principles of cryptography and network security. It
develops the mathematical tools required to understand the topic of cryptography. Starting from
the classical ciphers to modern day ciphers, the course provides an extensive coverage of the
techniques and methods needed for the proper functioning of the ciphers. The course deals with
the construction and cryptanalysis of block ciphers, stream ciphers and hash functions. The
course defines offers the construction and cryptanalysis of public key ciphers, namely RSA. The
key exchange problem and solutions using the Diffie-Hellman algorithm are discussed. Message
Authentication Codes (MAC) and signature schemes are also detailed. The course deals with
modern trends in asymmetric key cryptography, namely using Elliptic Curves. The course ends
with the awareness about different network attacks and precautions to be taken for the security.
Course Objectives:

The student should be made to:

1. To know the basics of Cryptography and Network Security.
2. To be able to secure a message over insecure channel by various means.
3. To learn about how to maintain the Confidentiality, Integrity and Availability of a data.
4. To have the knowledge of security requirements for a network against various threats
UNIT-I
Introduction: OSI Security Architecture - Classical Encryption techniques – Cipher
Principles – Data Encryption Standard – Block Cipher Design Principles and Modes of
Operation - Evaluation criteria for AES – AES Cipher – Triple DES – Placement of Encryption
Function – Traffic Confidentiality
UNIT-II
Public Key Cryptography Key Management - Diffie-Hellman key Exchange – Elliptic Curve
Architecture and Cryptography - Introduction to Number Theory – Confidentiality using
Symmetric Encryption – Public Key Cryptography and RSA.
UNIT-III
Authentication And Hash Function: Authentication requirements – Authentication
functions – Message Authentication Codes – Hash Functions – Security of Hash Functions
and MACs – MD5 message Digest algorithm - Secure Hash Algorithm – RIPEMD – HMAC
Digital Signatures – Authentication Protocols – Digital Signature Standard.
UNIT-IV
Network Security Authentication Applications: Kerberos – X.509 Authentication Service –
Electronic Mail Security – PGP – S/MIME - IP Security – Web Security.
UNIT-V
System Level Security Intrusion detection – password management – Viruses and related
Threats – Virus Counter measures – Firewall Design Principles – Trusted Systems.

151
 TextBook:

1. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security – Principles

and Practices”, Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2003.

References:
1. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
2. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2001.
3. Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”,
Third Edition, Pearson Education.

Course Outcomes
1.Understand different encryption techniques
2. Implement basic security algorithms required by any computing system
3. Analyze the vulnerabilities in any computing system to design a security solution
4. Analyze the possible security attacks and their effective countermeasures in real time
systems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

PO

CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 - - -

CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - 2 - - -

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - 3 3 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 3 3 1 1

152
 EC604C-Nano Electronics

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:
This course covers specialized topics in modern Nano electronics. It offers an introduction to
electron transport in Nano scale semiconductor devices as well as an introduction to magnetism
and spintronics. Models for Nano scale transistors and quantum effects in these will be treated.
Course Objectives:
This course is aimed to:
1. Make them understand various advanced concepts in Nano electronics.
2. Explode the fundamentals on QED, SED, molecular electronics, and spintronics.
3. Train the students on state of the art computational tools for modelling and simulation
of nano electronics devices.
UNIT I
Introduction: Evolution of science and nanotechnology, Introduction to nanotechnology,
Difference between Nano science and nanotechnology, Feynman predictions on Nano
technology, Role of up and top down approaches in nanotechnology, challenges in
nanotechnology.

UNIT II
Molecular Nanotechnology: Electron microscope – scanning electron microscope – atomic
force microscope –scanning tunnelling microscope – Nano manipulator – Nano tweezers – atom
manipulation – Nano dots – self-assembly – dip pen nanolithography.

UNIT III
Nano powders-Synthesis and processing of Nano powders-process for producing ultrafine
powders-mechanical milling, wet chemical synthesis, gas condensation process, chemical
vapour condensation, laser ablation, Design and synthesis of self-assembled nanostructured
materials.

UNIT–IV
Nano Materials: History of Materials, Definition, classification of Nanostructured Materials,
cause of interest in Nanomaterial’s, Nanomaterial’s preparation-present and future applications
of Nanomaterials,special nanomaterial’s, characterization and tools: carbon nanotubes, Nano
composites, carbon fullerenes: An overview of preparation, properties, Electron microscopy
techniques: scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy, scanning probe
Microscopy-X ray Methods

UNIT-V

Nano Electronics-Introduction to micro, Nano fabrication: optical lithography, Electron beam

lithography, Atomic lithography, Molecular beam Epitaxy, MEMS-Introduction, principles,

Types of MEMS:-Mechanical, Thermal, Magnetic MEMS, Fabrication of MEMS.

153
 Text /Reference Books:

1. Nano Materials by A S Edelstein& R C Cammarata, Institute of physics publishing,

Bristic and Philadelphia
2. Nanotechnology by Mark Ratner & Danier Ratner, Prentice Hall.
3. Micro Manufacturing and Nano technology by N.P.Mahalik.
4. G.W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nano electronics, Pearson, 2009.
5. W. Ranier, Nano electronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic
Material and Novel Devices), Wiley-VCH, 2003.
6. K.E. Drexler, Nano systems, Wiley, 1992.
E-resources and other digital material

nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php?branch=Ece , www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in
Course outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand various aspects of Nano-technology and the processes involved in
making Nano- components and material.
2. Leverage advantages of the Nano-materials and appropriate use in solving practical
problems.
3. Understand various aspects of Nano-technology and the processes involved in
making Nano-
components and material
4. Leverage advantages of the Nano-materials and appropriate use in solving practical
problems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1

CO2 1 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 1 1 1

CO3 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 - 1 2 - - 1 -

CO4 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1

154
 EC604C-Sensors and Transducers

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview: It is important to understand the concepts of Sensors and Transducers. When

selecting a system to use, it is important to understand the tradeoff among various components, so

you can accurately use appropriate instruments. This course will cover the basic concepts of

instrumentation that are important for you to understand, including the requirements for specific

applications.

Course Objectives:

The purpose of the course is

1. To know the performance characteristics of instrument and the quality of measurement
based on the type of transducer based on the transduction principles.
2. Understanding the concepts of Measurements and Developments in Sensor Technology.

UNIT- I
Instrument Characteristics: Block diagram of generalized instrument system, Static
characteristics - Desirable & Undesirable characteristics; Dynamic characteristics - Transfer
function, Dynamic response of zero order, First order and second order instruments to step input.
Measurement Errors and Statistical Analysis: Definition of parameters, Combination of
limiting error, Statistical treatment, Curve fitting methods.

UNIT- II
Transducers: Classification of transducers, Characteristics of transducers.
Passive Transducer Principles: Variable resistance - Change in length and area; Variable
inductance - Change in self-inductance, Change in mutual inductance, Production of eddy
currents, Variable capacitance - Change in area, Distance and dielectric.

UNIT- III
Active Transducer Principles: Thermoelectric, Piezoelectric and Photoelectric effects
Displacement Measurement: Introduction, Pneumatic transducers - Flapper Nozzle transducer;
Electrical transducers - Resistive, inductive and capacitive; Digital displacement transducer

UNIT- IV
Velocity, Acceleration and Vibration Measurement: Electromagnetic tachometer, Digital
Methods - Photo electric and toothed rotor variable reluctance tachometers, Principles of
accelerometers, Types of accelerometers - LVDT, Strain gauge and piezo electric accelerometers.

155
 UNIT- V
Developments in Sensor Technology: Introduction, Smart sensors, Micro sensors, IR radiation
sensors, Ultrasonic sensors, Fiber optic sensors, Chemical sensors and Bio sensors.

Text Books:
1. A.K.Ghosh, “Introduction to Measurements & Instrumentation”, 3rd Ed., PHI, 2009.
(UNIT I)
2. A.K.Sawhney & Puneet Sawhney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements &
Instrumentation”, 12th Ed., Dhanapat Rai & Co., 2012. (UNIT II & III)
3. D.V.S.Murty, “Transducers & Instrumentation”, 2nd, Ed., PHI. (UNIT IV)

Reference Books:
1. Raman Pallas-Arney & John G.Webster, “Sensors & Signal Conditioning”, 2nd Ed., J.
Wiley, 2012.
2. D.Patranabis, “Sensors and Transducers” 2nd Ed., PHI, 2013

E-resources and other digital material

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/4
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3

Course outcomes :

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Analyze the various performance characteristics of instrument and the quality of
Measurement.
2. Identify the type of transducer based on the transduction principles.
3. Select the relevant transducer for measurement of displacement, velocity and acceleration
to meet the requirements of industrial applications.
4. Identify the additional attributes in advanced sensors.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - -

CO4 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2

156
 EC604C- Electronic Instrumentation
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description: This course deals with the basics of electronic instruments used in
laboratory and industry. In the process they learn different type of instruments like voltmeter,
ammeter, Q meter, Bridges, transducers and display devices CRO, CRT. After learning this
subject student will be master in working principle and application of all types of instruments.
Course Objectives:
• To explain basic concepts and definitions in measurement.
• To describe the bridge configurations and their applications.
• To understand, design aspects and performance criterion of measuring instruments.
• To understand the working principle of various transducers.
UNIT-I
Measurement and Error: Definitions, accuracy and precision, types of errors.
DC Ammeters, DC Voltmeters, Series type ohmmeter, Shunt type ohmmeter. AC Voltmeter using
rectifiers, True RMS responding voltmeter. Analog Instruments – Transistor voltmeter, micro
voltmeter (chopper type) - DC differential voltmeter - AC voltmeters.

UNIT-II
Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes : Motion of electron in electric field and in magnetic field – Block
diagram of CRO, CRT, Electrostatic deflection sensitivity – Vertical and Horizontal deflection
systems – Principle of operation of Dual beam, Digital, Dual trace, Sampling and Storage CROs
– Measurements with CRO (voltage, current, time, frequency, phase angle, Lissajous figures).

UNIT-III
Q meter and measurement methods.Bridges: Wheatstone, Kelvin’s, Maxwell, Hay and Schering
bridges. Wave analyzers (AF & RF) - Harmonic distortion analyzers – Spectrum analyzer.

UNIT-IV
Digital instruments – Digital voltmeters (Ramp, Dual slope, stair case, successive approximation
types) Digital Multimeter, universal counter, Digital tachometer, Digital phase meter IEEE 488
Bus.

UNIT-V
Transducers – Classification and selection of transducers – strain gauges – Temperature
measurement (resistance thermometer, thermo couples and thermistors) LVDT – Peizo electric
transducer.

Text Books :
1. H.S.Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation” TMH, 1995.
2. Helfric and Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”,
PHI, 1995.
3. A.K.Sawhney , " Electrical and electronic measurements and instrumentation", Danapat
Rai & Co.,18th edition., 2007.

157
 E-resources and other digital material
1.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106070
2.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106070

Course outcomes :

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Emphasize the basic electronics measurement concepts & Design the different analog
and digital

electronics voltmeters
2. Identify and use different analyzers and oscilloscopes.
3. Design the Measurement of different bridges& generators to make measurements and
analyze measurement.
4. Analyze the concepts of Transducers based on applications.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - -

158
 B.Tech. (R20)

EC702C-Program Elective-III
Name of the Program Elective
S. No
Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic
1.
Radar Systems
2.
Testing and Testability
3.
Bio-Medical Electronics
4.

159
 EC702C-NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

To master the various fundamental concepts of fuzzy logic and artificial neural networks.

This will help you to get sufficient knowledge to analyze and design the various intelligent

control systems
Course Objectives:
1. This course introduces the basics of Neural Networks and essentials of Artificial
Neural Networks with Single Layer and Multilayer Feed Forward Networks.
2. It deals with Associate Memories and introduces Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic
system components.
3. The Neural Network and Fuzzy Network system application to Electrical
Engineering is also presented. This subject is very important and useful for doing
Project Work.
4. The main objective of this course is to provide the student with the basic
understanding of neural networks and fuzzy logic fundamentals.
Unit – 1
Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction to neural networks, biological neurons, artificial
neurons, McCulloch-Pitt’s neuron model, neuron modeling for artificial neural systems, feed
forward network, perceptron network, Supervised and un-supervised learning.
Learning Rules: Hebbian learning Rule, Perceptron learning Rule, Delta learning Rule,
Winner-take-all learning rule, Out-star learning rule.

Unit – 2
Supervised Learning: Perceptrons, exclusive OR problem, single layer perceptron network,
multi-layer feed forward networks: linearly non separable patter classification, delta learning
rule for multi perceptron layer, error back propagation algorithm, training errors , ADALINE,
introduction to Radial Basis Function Networks(RBFN).

Unit – 3
Un-Supervised Learning: Hamming net, Max net. Winner–take–all learning, counter
propagation network, feature mapping, self-organizing feature maps
Applications of neural Algorithms: elementary aspects of applications of character
recognition.
Neural Network control applications: Process identification, Basic dynamic learning control
architecture.

Unit – 4
Fundamentals of fuzzy logic and fuzzy sets: Definition of fuzzy set , a-level fuzzy set ,
cardinality, operations on fuzzy sets: union, intersection, complement, Cartesian product,
algebraic sum, definition of fuzzy relation, properties of fuzzy relations, fuzzy composition.

160
 Unit – 5
Design of Fuzzy Systems: Components of fuzzy systems, functions of fuzzification, Rule base
patterns, Inference mechanisms.

Methods of de-fuzzification: COG, COA, MOM, Weighted average, height methods, Design

of Fuzzy Systems for temperature setting of water heater, fuzzy system for control of air

conditioner.
Text / References Books:
1. S.Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic, and Genetic
Algorithms”, PHI, EEE, 2003.
2. FakhreddineO.Karrry&Clarance De Silva, “ Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems,
Design Theory, Tools and Applications”, Pearson, 2009.
3. Jacek M Zurada, “ Introduction to artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publications.

4. Zimmerman, “ Fuzzy Set Theory and its Applications” , Kluwer Academic Publishers.
5. Timothy J. Ross, “ Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications” ,( McGrawHill).
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be In a position to
1. Understand the Biological neural systems and construction of artificial neural systems.
2. Understand and explain different learning rules
3. Understand the concept of pattern classification.
4. Identify the different types of supervised and unsupervised training algorithms.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

CO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

PO

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - -

161
 EC702C-RADAR ENGINEERING

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

It is important to understand the concepts of principles of Radar Engineering, Mri radar and

practical applications of Radar.

Course Objectives:The purpose of the course is

1. To understand the basic principle of radar systems and Doppler and MTI Radar.
2. To know how the detection of Noise and principle of Radar receiver.

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR: Basic Radar, The simple form of the Radar Equation, Radar
Block Diagram and operation, Applications of Radar, The Radar Equation, Detection of Signals
in Noise, Receiver Noise and the Signal to-Noise Ratio, Probability Density Functions-
Probabilities of Detection and False Alarm-Integration of Radar Pulses, Radar Cross Section of
Targets Radar cross Section Fluctuations- Transmitter Power, Pulse Repetition Frequency-
System losses.

UNIT-II
MTI Radar: Introduction to Doppler and MTI Radar- Delay Line Cancellers, Staggered Pulse
Repetition Frequencies, Doppler Filter Banks, Digital MTI Processing, Moving Target Detector,
Limitations to MTI Performance.

UNIT- III
Pulse Doppler Radar: Tracking with Radar, Mono-pulse Tracking, Conical Scan and Sequential
Lobing, Limitations to Tracking Accuracy, Low-Angle Tracking: Tracking in Range, Other
Tracking Radar Topics, Comparison of Trackers, Automatic Tracking with Surveillance Radars
(ADT), Radar Antennas.

UNIT- IV
Detection of Signals in Noise: Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver, Detection Criteria,
Detectors, Automatic Detector, Integrators, Constant-False Alarm Rate Receivers, The Radar
operator, Signal Management

UNIT- V
The Radar Receiver: Receiver noise Figure, Super heterodyne Receiver, Radar Displays.
Applications: Electronic Support Measure (ESM), Electronic Counter Measure (ECM),
Electronic Counter-Counter Measure (ECCM), Stealth Technology.

Text Books:
1. Merrill I Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, 3rd edition, TMH, 2003.
2. Principles of Modern radar system, M. H. Carpentier, Artech House,1998.
3. Radar Technology, Brookner, Eli, Artech House

162
 4. Peyton Z Peebles Jr. (2004), “Radar Principles”, John Wiley Inc.,
5. Bahman Zohuri, ‘Radar Energy Warfare and the Challenges of Stealth Technology”,
Springer.

E-resources and other digital material

1. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-ll-003-build-a-small-radar-systemcapable-of-sensing-
range- doppler-and-synthetic-aperture-radar-imagingjanuary-iap-2011/lecture-notes/
2. http://www.radartutorial.eu/07.waves/wa04.en.html

Course outcomes

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the principles and applications of RADAR
2. Demonstrate the Doppler Effect and the concepts of continuous wave radars.
3. Analyze the tracking radar systems and mono pulse radar.
4. Understand radar signal detection in presence of noise and its performance

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO

CO 0 1 2 1 2

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 1

CO2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3

CO3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - - - -

163
 EC702C-Testing and Testability

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Pre-requisite, if any: Digital Logic Design
Course Overview: The purpose of the course is know the to understand the VLSI testing, types
of faults and Fault Diagnosis.
Course Objectives: The purpose of the course is
1. To learn the role of VLSI testing.
2. Understand the types of Faults, Design for Testability and Fault Diagnosis.
Unit-1
Role of testing in VLSI Design flow, Testing at different levels of abstraction, Fault error, defect,
diagnosis, yield, Types of testing, Rule of Ten, Defects in VLSI chip. Modelling basic concepts,
Functional modelling at logic level and register level, structure models, logic simulation, delay
models.
Unit-2
Various types of faults, Fault equivalence and Fault dominance in combinational sequential
circuits. Fault simulation applications, General fault simulation algorithms- Serial, and parallel,
Deductive fault simulation algorithms. Combinational circuit test generation, Structural Vs
Functional test, ATPG, Path sensitization methods.
Unit-3
Difference between combinational and sequential circuit testing, five and eight valued algebra,
and Scan chain-based testing method. D-algorithm procedure, Problems, PODEM Algorithm,
Problems on PODEM Algorithm. FAN Algorithm, Problems on FAN algorithm, Comparison of
D, FAN and PODEM Algorithms. Design for Testability, Ad-hoc design, Generic scan-based
design.
Unit-4
Classical scan-based design, System level DFT approaches, Test pattern generation for BIST, and
Circular BIST, BIST Architectures, and Testable memory design-Test Algorithms -Test
generation for Embedded RAMs.
Unit-5
Fault Diagnosis Logic Level Diagnosis - Diagnosis by UUT reduction - Fault Diagnosis for
Combinational Circuits - Self-checking design - System Level Diagnosis.

164
 Text Book(s):
1. M. Abramovici, M. Breuer, and A. Friedman, “Digital Systems Testing and Testable
Design, IEEE Press, 1990.
2. Stroud, “A Designer’s Guide to Built-in Self-Test”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

References & Web Resources:

3. M. Bushnell and V. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory &
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000
4. V. Agrawal and S.C. Seth, Test Generation for VLSI Chips, Computer Society Press.1989.
5. M. Abramovici, M.A. Breuer and A.D. Friedman, "Digital Systems and Testable Design",
Jaico Publishing House.
6. M.L. Bushnell and V.D. Agrawal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory
and Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers.
7. P.K. Lala, "Digital Circuit Testing and Testability", Academic Press, 2002.
8. A.L. Crouch, "Design Test for Digital IC's and Embedded Core Systems", Prentice Hall
International.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Identify the significance of testable design
2. Understand the concept of yield and identify the parameters influencing the same
3. Specify fabrication defects, errors and faults.
4. Implement combinational and sequential circuit test generation algorithms and techniques
to improve fault coverage

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 1

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 1 1

165
 EC702C-Bio-Medical Instrumentation

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview: The purpose of the course is know the human physiology and various
sources of

bioelectric signals and the types of electrodes to be used and Safety aspects to be followed.

Course Objectives: The purpose of the course is

1. To gain knowledge on human physiology for measurement of electrical and non-
electrical parameter in the human body.
2. Understand medical assisting and therapy equipment and safety measures when using Bio-
Medical Instrumentation.
Unit-1
Brief introduction to human physiology- Problems encountered while making measurements on
a human body-Structure of cell – Function of each components of the cell – Membrane potential
– Action potential – Generation and Conduction- Anatomy and Physiological aspects of
respiration.
Unit-2
Bio-electrodes and bio-potential amplifiers ---Origin of bio potential and its propagation.
Electrode-electrolyte interface, electrode–skin interface, half cell potential, impedance,
polarization effects of electrode – non-polarizable electrodes. Types of electrodes - surface,
needle and micro electrodes and their equivalent circuits. Recording problems .
Unit-3
. Need for bio-amplifier - single ended bio-amplifier, differential bio-amplifier, isolation
amplifiers, Chopper amplifier. ECG, EEG, EMG Lead systems and recording methods, Typical
waveforms.
Unit-4
Measurement of blood temperature, pressure and flow. Impedance plethysmography. Ultrasonic,
X-ray and nuclear imaging.
Prostheses and aids: Introduction to Pacemakers, defibrillators, heart-lung machine, Dialyzers,
Diathermy .
Unit-5
Safety aspects: – devices to protect against electrical hazards – Ground fault interrupter, isolation
transformer, line isolation monitor, receptacle tester, electrical safety analyzer equipment,
preventive maintenance.

Text Book:
1. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J, Weibell and Erich A. Pleiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation
and Measurements”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall of India, 2004
2. R.S.Kandpur. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, 2nd Ed., TataMcGraw Hill,
2011
3. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application & Design”, John Wiley & Sons

166
 E-resources and other digital material:

1. http://www.eeeuniversity.com/2013/08/ei2311-biomedical-instrumentation.html

Course outcomes: Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the physical foundations of biological systems and bioelectric potentials in
medical field and Examine the various sources of bioelectric signals and the types of
electrodesto be used.
2. Describe the acquisition and amplification of the bio-signals
3. Gain knowledge on the measurement of electrical and non-electrical parameter in the
human body and Understand medical assisting and therapy equipment.
4. Discuss on electrical safety, hazards, protection against shock and testing of electrical
systems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO

CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -

CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -

CO3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - -

167
 B.Tech. (R20)

EC703C-Program Elective-IV

S.No Name of the Program Elective

1. Satellite Communication

2. Fiber Optic Communications

3. Wireless Communications

4. MEMS

168
 EC703C-Satellite Communication
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

This course will provide you with an in-depth background of satellite communication techniques,

modern satellite multiple access, modulation and coding schemes, as well as providing an update

on key emerging technologies and future systems.

Course Objectives:
1. To Enable students to become familiar with satellites and satellite services.
2. Study of satellite orbits and launching.
3. Study of Earth segment and space segment components.
4. Study of satellite access by various users.
Unit -1
Introduction to Satellite Communication: Principles and architecture of satellite
Communication, Brief history of Satellite systems, advantages, disadvantages, applications and
frequency bands used for satellite communication.
Orbital Mechanics: Orbital equations, Kepler's laws, Apogee and Perigee for an elliptical orbit,
evaluation of velocity, orbital period, angular velocity etc. of a satellite, concepts of Solar day and
Sidereal day.
Unit -2
Satellite sub-systems: Study of Architecture and Roles of various sub-systems of a satellite
system such as Telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring (TTC & M), Attitude and orbit
control system (AOCS), Communication sub-system, power sub-systems etc.
Unit -3
Typical Phenomena in Satellite Communication: Solar Eclipse on satellite, its effects, remedies
for Eclipse, Sun Transit Outage phenomena, its effects and remedies, Doppler frequency shift
phenomena and expression for Doppler shift. Satellite link budget.
Unit -4
Satellite link budget: Flux density and received signal power equations, Calculation of System
noise temperature for satellite receiver, noise power calculation, Drafting of satellite link budget
and C/N ratio calculations in clear air and rainy conditions.
Unit -5

Modulation and Multiple Access Schemes: Various modulation schemes used in satellite

communication, Meaning of Multiple Access, Multiple access schemes based on time, frequency,

and code sharing namely TDMA, FDMA and CDMA.

Text /Reference Books:
1. Timothy Pratt Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnutt: Satellite Communications: Wiley India.
2nd edition 2002.
2. Tri T. Ha: Digital Satellite Communications: Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. Dennis Roddy: Satellite Communication: 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2009.

169
 Course Outcomes: At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Visualize the architecture of satellite systems as a means of high speed, high range
communication system.
2. State various aspects related to satellite systems such as orbital equations, sub-systems in a
satellite, link budget, modulation and multiple access schemes.

3. Solve numerical problems related to orbital motion and design of link budget for the given

parameters and conditions.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO1 PO1 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 - 1

CO2 2 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1

CO3 1 1 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 - - 1

170
 EC703C-Fiber Optic Communications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

Optical fibers have several advantages over conventional copper cables. Optical

communication enjoys high bandwidth and thus useful for transmitting huge information securely

and with less repeaters to longer distances. The performance of optical system is superior to

conventional communication and thus has widespread use in industry.

Course Objectives:

Optical Communication has got greater applicability and students of Communication

discipline should master the subject. This course will enable the students:
1. To understand deeply the fundamental aspects of optical communication
2. To analyze the types of fibers and understand the performance by comparison
3. To design optical receivers of optical systems
4. To simulate the performance through parameters like BER and S/N Ratio
5. To apply the principles of optical communication to networks.
Unit -1
Overview of Optical Fiber Communication: The evolution of fiber optic systems, elements of
an optical fiber transmission link, block diagram, advantages of optical fiber communication,
applications.
Introduction to vector nature of light, propagation of light, Ray theory transmission, total
internal reflection, acceptance angle, numerical aperture and skew rays, propagation of light in a
cylindrical dielectric rod, Ray model, wave model., Modes, electromagnetic mode theory and
propagation, single mode and multimode fibers, linearly polarized modes.

Unit -2
Different types of optical fibers, Fiber material, fiber cables and fiber fabrication, fiber joints,
fiber connectors, splicer, Modal analysis of a step index fiber. Signal degradation on optical fiber
due to dispersion and attenuation, Fabrication of fibers and measurement techniques like OTDR.

Unit -3
Optical Sources and Detectors: Coherent and non-coherent sources, quantum efficiency,
modulation capability of optical sources, LEDs: Working principle and characteristics, Laser
diodes: Working principle and characteristics, Working principle and characteristics of Photo-
detectors: PIN-diodes, APDs, detector responsivity, noise analysis in detectors, coherent and non-
coherent detection

171
 Unit -4

Optical Receiver, Switches & Amplifiers

Receiver structure, bit error rate of optical receivers, and receiver performance, Optical link

design - BER calculation, quantum limit, power penalties.

Optical switches - coupled mode analysis of directional couplers, electro-optic switches.
Optical amplifiers - EDFA, Raman amplifier.

Unit -5
Optical Networks: SONET and SDH standards, architecture of optical transport networks
(OTNs), network topologies, Operational principle of WDM and DWDM systems, WDM
network elements and Architectures, Principles of WDM networks, Solutions.
Nonlinear effects in fiber optic links: Concept of self-phase modulation, group velocity dispersion
and solution based communication.

Text/Reference Books:
1. J. Keiser, Fibre Optic communication, McGraw-Hill, 5th Ed. 2013 (Indian Edition).
2. John M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communications: Principles and Practice, Pearson, 3rd Ed.
2008.

G. Agrawal, Nonlinear fibre optics, Academic Press, 2nd Ed. 1994.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:
1. Understand the principles fiber-optic communication, the components and the bandwidth
advantages.
2. Understand the properties of the optical fibers and optical components.
3. Understand operation of lasers, LEDs, and detectors.
4. Analyze system performance of optical communication systems and design optical
networks and understand non-linear effects in optical fibers.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1

CO2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 1

CO3 2 1 3 2 1

CO4 - - - - 2 2 - 2 - 1 2 -

172
 EC703C-WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
This course provides a comprehensive overview and advanced knowledge of modern mobile
and wireless communication systems. Building on the prior knowledge on digital communications,
students develop further understanding on the challenges and opportunities brought by the wireless
medium in designing current and future wireless communication systems and networks.

Course Objectives:

1. To provide the students with the fundamental treatment about many practical and theoretical
concepts that forms Basic of wireless communications.
2. To equip the students with various kinds of wireless networks and it’s operations .
3. To provide an to provide analytical perspective on the design and analysis of traditional and
emerging wireless networks, And to discuss the need to get off and solution methods, the
fundamental problems in wireless networking .
4. To train students do understand the architecture and operation of various wireless wide area
networks such as GSM, IS-95, GPRS and SMS.
5. To train students to understand wireless LAN architectures and operations.
6. To prepare students to understand the emerging techniques OFDM and its importance in the
wireless communications.

UNIT-I
THE CELLULAR CONCEPT-SYSTEM DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS: Introduction, Frequency
reuse, Channel assignment strategies, Handoffs strategies-prioritizing handoffs, Practical handoff
considerations, Interference and system capacity – Co-channel interference and system capacity,
Channel planning for wireless systems, Adjacent channel interference, Power control for reducing
interference, Trunking and grade of service, Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems -
Cell splitting, Sectoring.
UNIT-II
MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION LARGE-SCALE PATH LOSS: Introduction to radio wave
propagation, Free space propagation model, Relating power to electric field, The three basic
propagation mechanisms, Reflection-reflection from dielectrics, Brewster angle, Reflection from
prefect conductors, Ground reflection (two-ray) model, Diffraction-fresnel zone geometry, Knife-edge
diffraction model, Multiple knife-edge diffraction, Scattering, Outdoor propagation models-Longley-
Ryce model, Okumura model, Hata model, PCS extension to Hata model, Walfisch and Bertoni losses
(Same floor), Partition losses between floors, Log-distance path loss model, Ericsson multiple
breakpoint model, Attenuation factor model, Signal penetration into buildings, Ray tracing and site
specific modeling.
UNIT-III
MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION: SMALL-SCALE FADING AND MULTIPATH: Small
scale multipath propagation-factors influencing small scale fading, Doppler shift, Impulse response

173
model of a multipath channel-Relationship between Bandwidth and received power, small-scale
multipath measurements Direct RF pulse system, Spread spectrum sliding correlator channel sounding,
Frequency domain channels sounding, Parameters of mobile multipath channels-time dispersion
parameters, Coherence bandwidth, Doppler spread and coherence time, Types of small-scale fading-
fading effects, Due to multipath time delay spread, flat fading, Frequency selective fading, Fading
effects due to Doppler spread-fast fading, Slow fading, Statistical models for multipath fading
channels-clarke’s model for flat fading, Spectral shape due to Doppler spread in Clarke’s model,
Simulation of Clarke and gans fading model, Level crossing and fading st statistics, Two-ray Rayleigh
fading model.
UNIT-IV
EQUALIZATION AND DIVERSITY: Introduction, Fundamentals of equalization, Training a
generic adaptive equalizer, Equalizers in a communication receiver, Linear equalizers, Non-linear
equalization Decision Feedback Equalization (DFE), Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation
(MLSE) Equalizer, Algorithms for adaptive equalization-zero forcing algorithm, Least means square
algorithm, Recurisve least squares algorithm, Diversity techniques-derivation of selection diversity
improvement, Derivation of maximal ratio combining improvement, Practical space diversity
consideration-selection diversity, Feedback or scanning diversity, Maximal ratio combining, Equal
gain combining, Polarization diversity, Frequency diversity, Time diversity, RAKE receiver.
UNIT-V
WIRELESS NETWORKS: Introduction to wireless networks, Advantages and disadvantages of
wireless local area networks, WLAN topologies, WLAN standard IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.11 medium
access control, Comparision of IEEE 802.11 a, b, g and n standards, IEEE 802.16 and its enhancements,
Wireless PANs, HiperLan, WLL.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rappaport,T.S., ―Wireless communications‖, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2010.(UNIT I, II, IV)
2. Andreas.F. Molisch, ―Wireless Communications‖, John Wiley – India, 2006.(UNIT III,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Wireless Communication –Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2011
2. Van Nee, R. and Ramji Prasad, ―OFDM for wireless multimedia communications,
Artech House, 2000
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Upena Dalal, ―Wireless Communication‖, Oxford University Press, 2009.

Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Understand the principles of wireless communications.
2. Understand fundamentals of wireless networking.
3. Understand cellular system design concepts.
4. Analyse various multiple access schemes used in wireless communication.

174
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - 1

CO2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 1 - 1

CO3 - 1 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 - -

CO4 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 - 1

175
 EC703C-MEMS

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Overview:

The course will cover fabrication technologies, material properties, structural mechanics, basic

sensing and actuation principles, packaging, and MEMS markets and applications. The course

will emphasize the fabrication and materials of micro/nano systems.

Course Objectives:
1. Key aim is to learn micro-electro-mechanical systems (MEMS) and micro-integrated
system.
2. Properties of useful materials will be discussed in context to MEMS and BioMEMS.
Micro-electronics process modules used in the design and fabrication of MEMS and
micro-integrated systems will be presented.
3. Applications of these systems in a variety of sensors and transducers for broad ranges of
implantable biomedical applications will be described.
4. Recent advances in wearable biomedical applications of MEMS and bio MEMS will
also be discussed in detail.
Unit -1
Introduction and Historical Background, Scaling Effects, Micro/Nano Sensors.

Unit -2
Actuators and Systems overview: Case studies.

Unit -3
Review of Basic MEMS fabrication modules: Oxidation, Deposition Techniques, Lithography
(LIGA), and Etching.

Unit -4
Micromachining: Surface Micromachining, sacrificial layer processes, Stiction, Bulk
Micromachining, Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching, Wafer Bonding.

Unit -5

Mechanics of solids in MEMS/NEMS: Stresses, Strain, Hookes’s law, Poisson effect, Linear

Thermal Expansion, Bending; Energy methods, Overview of Finite Element Method, Modeling

of Coupled Electromechanical Systems.

Text/Reference Books:
1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalkrishnan K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro
and Smart Systems, Wiley India, 2012.

176
 2. S. E.Lyshevski, Nano-and Micro-Electromechanical systems: Fundamentals of
Nano-and
3. Microengineering (Vol. 8). CRC press, (2005).
4. S. D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001.
5. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997.
6. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, McGraw-Hill, Boston, 1998.
7. M.H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and
Gyroscopes, Elsevier, New York, 2000.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:
1. Appreciate the underlying working principles of MEMS and NEMS devices.
2. Design and model MEM devices.
3. Gain a knowledge of basic approaches for various sensor design
4. Gain the technical knowledge required for computer-aided design, fabrication, analysis
and characterization of Nano-structured materials, micro- and Nano-scale devices.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 2 1 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 - -

CO2 1 - 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 -

CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 -

CO4 2 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 - - -

177
 B.Tech. (R20)

EC704C-Program Elective-V

S.No Name of the Program Elective

1. Embedded System Design
2. Real Time Operating System
3. FPGA Based System Design
4. Digital Signal Processors & Architectures

178
 EC704C-Embedded System Design

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:
This course is to enable the students to understand embedded-system programming and apply
that knowledge to design and develop embedded solutions. Interaction with peripheral devices.
Activities. Identify hardware and software components to build an embedded system.
Prerequisite: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers; Computer Organization and Operating
Systems.
Course Objectives:
1. To provide an overview of Design Principles of Embedded System.
2. To provide clear understanding about the role of firmware.
3. To understand the necessity of operating systems in correlation with hardware systems.
4. To learn the methods of interfacing and synchronization for tasking.

UNIT - I:

Introduction to Embedded Systems: Definition of Embedded System, Embedded Systems Vs

General Computing Systems, History of Embedded Systems, Classification, Major Application

Areas, Purpose of Embedded Systems, Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded

Systems.

UNIT - II:

Typical Embedded System: Core of the Embedded System: General Purpose and Domain

Specific Processors, ASICs, PLDs, Commercial Off-The-Shelf Components (COTS), Memory:

ROM, RAM, Memory according to the type of Interface, Memory Shadowing, Memory selection

for Embedded Systems, Sensors and Actuators, Communication Interface: Onboard and External

Communication Interfaces.

UNIT - III:

Embedded Firmware: Reset Circuit, Brown-out Protection Circuit, Oscillator Unit, Real Time

Clock, Watchdog Timer, Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development Languages.

UNIT - IV:

RTOS Based Embedded System Design: Operating System Basics, Types of Operating Systems,

Tasks, Process and Threads, Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Task Scheduling.

179
 UNIT - V:

Task Communication: Shared Memory, Message Passing, Remote Procedure Call and Sockets,

Task Synchronization: Task Communication/Synchronization Issues, Task Synchronization

Techniques, Device Drivers, Methods to Choose an RTOS.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Introduction to Embedded Systems - Shibu K.V, Mc Graw Hill.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Embedded Systems - Raj Kamal, TMH.
2. Embedded System Design - Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, John Wiley.
3. Embedded Systems – Lyla, Pearson, 2013
4. An Embedded Software Primer - David E. Simon, Pearson Education.
5.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide an overview of Design Principles of Embedded System.
2. To provide clear understanding about the role of firmware.
3. To understand the necessity of operating systems in correlation with hardware systems.
4. To learn the methods of interfacing and synchronization for tasking.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 1 - -

CO3 2 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO4 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - 1 - -

180
 EC704C-Real Time Operating System

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Abstract / Outline:

In several software applications, especially in embedded application, the operating system is

required to support the application to meet the timing constraints. The operating system achieves

this by deploying suitable scheduling algorithms. A major problem arises, when the real-time tasks

share resources. Priority inversions can take place in this case, unless suitable techniques are

deployed. Starting with a brief introduction to real-time operating systems, we first discuss the

important real-time task/thread scheduling algorithms and resource sharing protocols. An effort
towards standardization of real-time operating systems has come to be known as POSIX-RT. We

review POSIX-RT requirements. Besides, we review several commercial and open source real-

time operating systems.

Prerequisites: C Programming, Computer Organization and Operating Systems, and Operating
Systems.
Course Objectives:
1. To provide an overview of Design Principles of Embedded System.
2. To provide clear understanding about the role of firmware.
3. To understand the necessity of operating systems in correlation with hardware system.
4. To learn the methods of interfacing and synchronization for tasking.
UNIT – I:
Introduction: Introduction to UNIX/LINUX, Overview of Commands, File I/O, ( open, create,
close, lseek, read, write), Process Control ( fork, vfork, exit, wait, waitpid, exec).
UNIT – II:
Real Time Operating Systems: Brief History of OS, Defining RTOS, The Scheduler, Objects,
Services, Characteristics of RTOS, defining a Task, asks States and Scheduling, Task Operations,
Structure, Synchronization, Communication and Concurrency. Defining Semaphores, Operations
and Use, Defining Message Queue, States, Content, Storage, Operations and Use.

UNIT – III:

Objects, Services and I/O: Pipes, Event Registers, Signals, Other Building Blocks, Component

Configuration, Basic I/O Concepts, I/O Subsystem.

181
 UNIT – IV:

Exceptions, Interrupts and Timers: Exceptions, Interrupts, Applications, Processing of

Exceptions and Spurious Interrupts, Real Time Clocks, Programmable Timers, Timer Interrupt

Service Routines (ISR), Soft Timers, Operations.

UNIT – V:

Case Studies of RTOS: RT Linux, Micro C/OS-II, Vx Works, Embedded Linux, and Tiny OS.

TEXT BOOK:

1. Qing Li, “Real Time Concepts for Embedded Systems”, 2011, Elsevier.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming, and Design”, 2007, TMH.
2. W. Richard Stevens, Stephan A. Rago, “Advanced UNIX Programming”, 2006, 2nd
Edition, Pearson.
3. Dr. Craig Hollabaugh, “Embedded Linux: Hardware, Software and Interfacing”, 2008, 1st
Edition, Pearson.

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand concepts of Real-Time systems and modeling
2. Recognize the characteristics of a real-time system
3. Understand and develop document on an architectural design of a real-time
system
4. Develop and document Task scheduling, resource management, real-time
operating systems and fault tolerant applications of Real-Time Systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1 - 1

CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1

CO4 1 3 3 1 1 - - - 1 - 1 1 - -

182
 EC704C-FPGA Based System Design

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Pre-Requisite(s): Digital Logic Design

Course Description: This course covers the advanced design and analysis of digital circuits with HDL.

The primary goal is to provide in depth understanding of system design. The course enables students to

apply their knowledge for the design of advanced digital hardware systems with help of FPGA tools.

Course Objectives:
1. Understand Digital system design using HDL.
2. Know FPGA architecture, interconnect and technologies.
3. Know different FPGA’s and implementation methodologies.
4. Understand configuring and implementing digital embedded system, micro-controllers,
microprocessors, DSP algorithms on FPGA.

UNIT I:

Verilog HDL Coding Style: Lexical Conventions - Ports and Modules – Operators - Gate Level

Modeling - System Tasks &Compiler Directives - Test Bench - Data Flow Modeling - Behavioral level

Modeling -Tasks & Functions.

UNIT II:

Overview of FPGA Architectures and Technologies: FPGA Architectural options, coarse vs fine

grained, vendor specific issues (emphasis on Xilinx FPGA), Antifuse, SRAM and EPROM based

FPGAs, FPGA logic cells, interconnection network and I/O Pad.

UNIT III:

Verilog Modelling of Combinational and Sequential Circuits: Behavioral, Data Flow and Structural

Realization – Adders – Multipliers- Comparators - Flip Flops - Realization of Shift Register - Realization

of a Counter- Synchronous and Asynchronous FIFO –Single port and Dual port RAM – Pseudo Random

LFSR – Cyclic Redundancy Check.

UNIT IV

Synchronous Sequential Circuits: State diagram-state table –state assignment-choice of flipflops –

Timing diagram –One hot encoding Mealy and Moore state machines – Design of serial adder using

183
 Mealy and Moore state machines - State minimization – Sequence detection- Design examples:

Sequence detector, Serial adder, Vending machine using One Hot Controller. Optimization of Speed:

Introduction, Strategies for Timing Improvement; Optimization of Area, Optimization of power.

Unit V

FPGA and its Architecture: Types of Programmable Logic Devices- PLA & PAL- FPGA Generic

Architecture. Types of FPGAs, CLBs vs LAB vs Slices, MUX vs LUT based logic implementation,

ALTERA Cyclone II Architecture – Timing Analysis and Power analysis using Quartus-II- SOPC

Builder- NIOS-II Soft-core Processor- System Design Examples using ALTERA FPGAs – Traffic light

Controller, Real Time Clock -Interfacing using FPGA: VGA, Keyboard, LCD.

Text Books:
1. M.J.S. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Pearson, 2000.
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis” Prentice Hall, Second
Edition, 2003, ISBN: 0130449113.
3. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA Based System Design”, with CD-ROM, 2004, Prentice Hall, ISBN:
0131424610.
4. S. Ramachandran, “Digital VLSI System Design: A Design Manual for implementation of Projects
on FPGAs and ASICs Using Verilog” Springer Publication, 2007.
5. Stephen Brown & ZvonkoVranesic, “Digital Logic Design with Verilog HDL” TATA McGraw
Hill Ltd. 2nd Edition 2007.
References:
1. Pong P. Chu, “FPGA Prototyping by Verilog Examples: Xilinx Spartan-3,” Wiley-Interscience, 1st
Edition, 2008, ISBN-10: 0470185325.
2. Steven Kilts, “Advanced FPGA Design: Architecture, Implementation and Optimization” Wiley-
IEEE Press, 1st Edition, 2007, ISBN:0470054379
3. Peter Ashenden, “Digital Design using Verilog”, Elsevier, 2007.
4. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL,” First Edition, 2003, Prentice
Hall, ISBN: 0130891614.

Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Design and optimize complex combinational and sequential digital circuits by using Verilog HDL.
2. Design and model digital circuits with Verilog HDL at behavioural, structural, and RTL Levels.
3. Develop test benches to simulate combinational and sequential circuits and analyse Digital design
in terms of area, power and speed..
4. Understand the FPGA Architecture and Implementation of the combinational and sequential digital
circuits in FPGA.

184
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 - 3 - - - - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO3 - - 3 - - - - - 1 - - 2 - -

CO4 - - 3 - - - - - 1 - - 1 - -

185
 EC704C-Digital Signal Processors & Architectures

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60

Course Description:

This course explains fundamental concepts of Digital Signal Processing and implementation of

various applications on Advanced Processor. Helps students to understand architecture of

advanced Digital Signal Processor and how to program it for signal processing applications.

Prerequisite: Students should have an understanding of Microcontroller architecture as well as

basic C and assembly language programming skills and basic understanding of discrete time

signals and systems

Course Objectives:
1. To describe features and architectural improvements of DSP processors.
2. To introduce addressing modes and instruction description of TMS320C6x processors.
3. To demonstrate data representation in DSP Processors and FIR filters.
4. 4. To demonstrate the usefulness of the adaptive filters and learn techniques of code
optimization.
Unit 1
Programmable DSP Hardware: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard), DSP core
algorithms (FIR, IIR, Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating Point
Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in Digital Signal Processors (like MAC unit,
Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking.

Unit 2
Structural and Architectural Considerations: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas Instruments
TMS320 Digital Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors: TMS320C1X and
TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal Architecture, Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Auxiliary
Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit-reverse Addressing), Basics of
TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements and new applications
fields, TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System, Peripheral Devices,
Illustrative Examples for assembly coding.

Unit 3
VLIW Architecture: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP Processors,
TMS320C6X Family, Addressing Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed study of
ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed Cand Assembly Language
programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded
environment.

186
Unit 4
Multi-core DSPs: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP hardware,
Concept of threads, introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous and
homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel programming –OpenMP approach of
parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for loop,
sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem).

Unit 5

FPGA based DSP Systems: Limitations of P-DSPs, Requirements of Signal processing for

Cognitive Radio (SDR), FPGA based signal processing design-case study of a complete design of

DSP processor,High Performance Computing using P-DSP: Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, OpenMP,

multicore DSP as HPC infrastructure.

Textbooks and References:

1. M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st
Edition, PHI, 2006.
2. Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2011
3. Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff
McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman,2000.
4. Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC
Press,2010.
5. Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications and
Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2006.
6. E.S.Gopi, “Algorithmic Collections for Digital Signal Processing Applications Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, Springer Netherlands,2007.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of this course students will be able to

1. Identify and formalize architectural level characterization of P-DSP hardware
2. Ability to design, programming (assembly and C), and testing code using Code Composer
Studio environment
3. Deployment of DSP hardware for Control, Audio and Video Signal processing
applications
4. Understanding of major areas and challenges in DSP based embedded systems

187
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02

CO

CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -

CO2 1 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO3 1 3 3 3 2 1 - - 1 - - - 1 -

CO4 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 1 - -

188
 SYLLABUS
FOR
Honors Degree, Minors in Electronics
and Minors in Communications

189
 Courses offered for Honors degree

ECHN01- Advanced Digital Signal Processing

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: Digital signal processing is a method of processing real world signals (represented
by a sequence of numbers) using mathematical techniques to perform transformations or extract
information.
Course Objectives:
1. To analyze multirate DSP systems.
2. To determine coefficients for perfect reproduction filter banks and wavelets.
3. To choose parameters to take a wavelet transform, and interpret and process the result.

UNIT-I
Multi rate DSP, Decimators and Interpolators, Sampling rate conversion, multistage decimator &
interpolator, poly phase filters, QMF, digital filter banks, Applications in sub band coding
UNIT-II
Linear prediction & optimum linear filters, stationary random process, forward-backward linear
prediction filters, solution of normal equations, AR Lattice and ARMA Lattice-Ladder Filters, Wiener
Filters for Filtering and Prediction.
UNIT-III
Adaptive Filters, Applications, Gradient Adaptive Lattice, Minimum mean square criterion, LMS
algorithm, Recursive Least Square algorithm
UNIT-IV
Estimation of Spectra from Finite-Duration Observations of Signals. Nonparametric Methods for Power
Spectrum Estimation, Parametric Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation, Minimum-Variance Spectral
Estimation, Eigenanalysis Algorithms for Spectrum Estimation.

UNIT-V
Application of DSP & Multi rate DSP, Application to Radar, introduction to wavelets, application to
image processing, design of phase shifters, DSP in speech processing & other applications.
Text Books :
1.J.G.Proakis and D.G.Manolakis“Digital signal processing: Principles, Algorithm and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
2.N. J. Fliege, “Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Multirate Systems -Filter Banks –
Wavelets”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 1999.
3.Bruce W. Suter, “Multirate and Wavelet Signal Processing”,1st Edition, Academic Press, 1997.
4.M. H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
2002.
5.S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6.D.G.Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M.Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”,
McGraw Hill, 2000.
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. To understand theory of different filters and algorithms
2. To understand theory of multi rate DSP, solve numerical problems and write algorithms
3. To understand theory of prediction and solution of normal equations
4. To know applications of DSP at block level

190
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
2 1
CO1 3 3 2 1 1
3 3 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO4

191
 ECHN02- Antennas and Radiating Systems
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: Radiation intensity, or the antenna power pattern, in a given direction is defined
as the power radiated from an antenna per unit solid angle. The radiation intensity is a far field parameter
which can be obtained by simply multiplying the radiation power density by the square distance
Course Objectives:
1. To fundamental antenna parameters and numerical methods to analyze and differentiate the
antennas.
2. To concept of radiation mechanism of various antennas.
3. To mechanism and models for radio-wave propagation.

UNIT-I
Types of Antennas: Wire antennas, Aperture antennas, Micro strip antennas, Array antennas Reflector
antennas, Lens antennas, Radiation Mechanism, Current distribution on thin wire antenna.
Fundamental Parameters of Antennas: Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density, Radiation Intensity,
Directivity, Gain, Antenna efficiency, Beam efficiency, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input Impedance,
radiation efficiency, Antenna Vector effective length, Friis Transmission equation, Antenna Temperature.
UNIT-II
Linear Wire Antennas: Infinitesimal dipole, Small dipole, Region separation, Finite length dipole, half
wave dipole, Ground effects.
Loop Antennas: Small Circular loop, Circular Loop of constant current, Circular loop with non uniform
current.
UNIT-III
LinearArrays: Two element array, N Element array: Uniform Amplitude and spacing, Broadside and End
fire array, Super directivity, Planar array, Design consideration.

UNIT-IV
Aperture Antennas: Huygen’s Field Equivalence principle, radiation equations, Rectangular Aperture,
Circular Aperture.
Horn Antennas: E-Plane, H-plane Sectoral horns, Pyramidal and Conical horns.
UNIT-V
Micro strip Antennas: Basic Characteristics, Feeding mechanisms, Method of analysis, Rectangular
Patch, Circular Patch, Reflector Antennas: Plane reflector, parabolic reflector, Cassegrain reflectors,
Introduction to MIMO.
Text Books :
1. Constantine A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 4th
edition, 2016.
2. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for All Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2002.
3. R.C.Johnson and H.Jasik, “Antenna Engineering hand book”, Mc-Graw Hill, 1984.
4. I.J.Bhal and P.Bhartia, “Micro-strip antennas”, Artech house, 1980.
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Compute the far field distance, radiation pattern and gain of an antenna for given current
distribution.
2. Estimate the input impedance, efficiency and ease of match for antennas.
3. Compute the array factor for an array of identical antennas.
4. Design antennas and antenna arrays for various desired radiation pattern characteristics.

192
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
2 1
CO1 3 2 2 1 1

2 1 3 - 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO3
2 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 2
CO4

193
 CHN03- Wireless and Mobile Communications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course offers an insight into the concepts of mobile and wireless data
communication technologies. The objective of this course is to enable the student to understand the
emerging technologies of wireless and mobile communications and simulate them.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the new trends in mobile/wireless communications networks.
2. To understand multiple radio access techniques.
3. To analyze various routing algorithms used in mobile/wireless networks.
4. To identify the issues in transport and application layers.
UNIT-I
Cellular Communication Fundamentals: Cellular system design, Frequency reuse, cell splitting, handover
concepts, Co channel and adjacent channel interference, interference reduction techniques and methods to
improve cell coverage, Frequency management and channel assignment.GSM architecture and interfaces,
GSM architecture details, GSM subsystems, GSM Logical Channels, Data Encryption in GSM, Mobility
Management, Call Flows in GSM.2.5 G Standards: High speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD), General
Packet Radio Service (GPRS), 2.75 G Standards: EDGE.
. UNIT-II
Spectral efficiency analysis based on calculations for Multiple access technologies: TDMA, FDMA and
CDMA, Comparison of these technologies based on their signal separation techniques, advantages,
disadvantages and application areas. Wireless network planning (Link budget and power spectrum
calculations)
UNIT-III
Mobile Radio Propagation: Large Scale Path Loss, Free Space Propagation Model, Reflection, Ground
Reflection (Two-Ray) Model, Diffraction, Scattering, Practical Link Budget Design using Path Loss
Models, Outdoor Propagation Models, Indoor Propagation Models, Signal Penetration into Buildings.
Small Scale Fading and Multipath Propagation, Impulse Response Model, Multipath Measurements,
Parameters of Multipath channels, Types of Small Scale Fading: Time Delay Spread; Flat, Frequency
selective, Doppler Spread; Fast and Slow fading

UNIT-IV
Equalization, Diversity: Equalizers in a communications receiver, Algorithms for adaptive equalization,
diversity techniques, space, polarization, frequency diversity, Interleaving
UNIT-V
Code Division Multiple Access: Introduction to CDMA technology, IS 95 system Architecture, Air
Interface, Physical and logical channels of IS 95, Forward Link and Reverse link operation, Physical and
Logical channels of IS 95 CDMA, IS 95 CDMA Call Processing, soft Handoff, Evolution of IS 95
(CDMA One) to CDMA 2000, CDMA 2000 layering structure and channels.
Higher Generation Cellular Standards:3G Standards: evolved EDGE, enhancements in 4G standard,
Architecture and representative protocols, call flow for LTE, VoLTE, UMTS, introduction to 5G.
Text Books :
1. V.K.Garg, J.E.Wilkes, “Principle and Application of GSM”, Pearson Education, 5th
edition, 2008.
2. V.K.Garg, “IS-95 CDMA & CDMA 2000”, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2009.
3. T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and Practice”, 2nd edition,
PHI,2002.
4. William C.Y.Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Analog and Digital Systems”,
2nd edition, TMH, 1995.
5. Asha Mehrotra, “A GSM system Engineering” Artech House Publishers Bosten, London,
1997.

194
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Apply frequency-reuse concept in mobile communications, and to analyze its effects on

interference, system capacity, handoff techniques .
2. Distinguish various multiple-access techniques for mobile communications e.g. FDMA, TDMA,
CDMA, and their advantages and disadvantages.
3. Analyze path loss and interference for wireless telephony and their influences on a mobile-
communication system’s performance.
4. Analyze and design CDMA system functioning with knowledge of forward and reverse channel
details, advantages and disadvantages of using the technology

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
2 1
CO1 3 3 2 1 1
3 3 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3 3 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 3 3
CO4

195
 ECHN04- Voice and Data Networks
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description:
This course provides an introduction to voice and data networking technologies, including public and priv
ate voice services, Ethernet and Internet data technologies, network security, business applications and net
work management. The structure, regulation, andhistory of the telecom and data network industry will be
discussed as well.
Course Objectives:
1. To protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale.
2. To routing, transport, DNS resolutions
3. To network extensions and next generation architecture.
UNIT-I
Network Design Issues, Network Performance Issues, Network Terminology, centralized and distributed
approaches for networks design, Issues in design of voice and data networks

. UNIT-II
Layered and Layer less Communication, Cross layer design of Networks, Voice Networks (wired and
wireless) and Switching, Circuit Switching and Packet Switching, Statistical Multiplexing.

UNIT-III
Data Networks and their Design, Link layer design- Link adaptation, Link Layer Protocols,
Retransmission. Mechanisms (ARQ), Hybrid ARQ (HARQ), Go Back N, Selective Repeat protocols and
their analysis.
UNIT-IV
Queuing Models of Networks , Traffic Models , Little's Theorem, Markov chains, M/M/1 and other
Markov systems, Multiple Access Protocols , Aloha System , Carrier Sensing , Examples of Local area
networks.
UNIT-V
Inter-networking, Bridging, Global Internet, IP protocol and addressing, Sub netting, Classless Inter
domain Routing (CIDR) , IP address lookup , Routing in Internet. End to End Protocols, TCP and UDP.
Congestion Control, Additive Increase/Multiplicative Decrease, Slow Start, Fast Retransmit/ Fast
Recovery, Congestion avoidance, RED TCP Throughput Analysis, Quality of Service in Packet
Networks, Network Calculus, Packet Scheduling Algorithms.
Text Books :
1. D. Bertsekas and R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1992.
2. L. Peterson and B. S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”,5th Edition,
Morgan Kaufman, 2011.
3. Kumar, D. Manjunath and J. Kuri, “Communication Networking: An analytical
approach”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2004.
4. Walrand,“Communications Network: A First Course”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. Leonard Kleinrock, “Queueing Systems,Volume I: Theory”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 1975.
6. Aaron Kershenbaum,Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms,McGraw Hill,
1993.
7. Vijay Ahuja, “Design and Analysis of Computer Communication Networks”,
McGraw Hill, 1987
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

196
 1. Understand Protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale.
2. Analyze Routing, transport, DNS resolutions
3. Know about Network extensions and next generation architectures
4. Analyze and design voice and data networking technologies

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
3 3 2 2 1 1
CO1
3 3 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4

197
 ECHN05- Advanced Communication Networks
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: Basic techniques for modeling and analyzing communication networks. Fairness
and utility functions, routing, congestion control, pricing, queuing models, loss networks, multi-class
queues and scheduling.
Course Objectives:
1. To fairness and network utility maximization
2. To optimization based routing and congestion control
3. To basic queuing models and their application to switching and scheduling in networks.

UNIT-I
Overview of Internet-Concepts, challenges and history. Overview of -ATM. TCP/IP Congestion and Flow
Control in Internet-Throughput analysis of TCP congestion control. TCP for high bandwidth delay
networks. Fairness issues in TCP.
. UNIT-II
Real Time Communications over Internet. Adaptive applications. Latency and throughput issues.
Integrated Services Model (intServ). Resource reservation in Internet. RSVP.
Characterization of Traffic by Linearly Bounded Arrival Processes (LBAP). Leaky bucket
Algorithm and its properties.
UNIT-III
Packet Scheduling Algorithms-requirements and choices. Scheduling guaranteed service
connections. GPS, WFQ and Rate proportional algorithms. High speed scheduler design. Theory of
Latency Rate servers and delay bounds in packet switched networks for LBAP traffic.;
Active Queue Management - RED, WRED and Virtual clock. Control theoretic analysis of active queue
management
UNIT-IV
IP address lookup-challenges. Packet classification algorithms and Flow Identification-Grid of Tries,
Cross producting and controlled prefix expansion algorithms.
Admission control in Internet. Concept of Effective bandwidth. Measurement based admission control.
Differentiated Services in Internet (DiffServ). DiffServ architecture and framework
UNIT-V
IPV4, IPV6, IP tunnelling, IPswitching and MPLS, Overview of IP over ATM and its evolution to IP
switching. MPLS architecture and framework. MPLS Protocols. Traffic engineering issues in MPLS.
Text Books :
1. Jean Wairand and Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communications Networks”, 2nd
edition, 2000.
2.Jean Le Boudec and Patrick Thiran, “Network Calculus A Theory of Deterministic
Queueing Systems for the Internet”, Springer Veriag, 2001.
3.Zhang Wang, “Internet QoS”, Morgan Kaufman, 2001.
4.Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath and Joy Kuri, “Communication Networking: An Analytical
Approach” , Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2004.
5.George Kesidis, “ATM Network Performance”, Kluwer Academic, Research Papers, 2005.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand advanced concepts in Communication Networking.
2. Design and develop protocols for Communication Networks.
3. Understand the mechanisms in Quality of Service in networking.
4. Optimise the Network Design.

198
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO1
3 3 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO4

199
 ECHN06- Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course introduces fundamental concepts, theories, and algorithms for pattern
recognition and machine learning, which are used in computer vision, speech recognition, data mining,
statistics, information retrieval, and bioinformatics. Topics include: Bayesian decision theory, parametric
and non-parametric learning, data clustering, component analysis, boosting techniques, support vector
machine, and deep learning with neural networks.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand, describe and critique pattern recognition, machine learning and deep learning
techniques.
2. To identify and select suitable modeling, learning and prediction techniques to solve a problem.
3. To design and implement a machine learning solution.
4. To appraise ethical and privacy issues of artificial intelligence techniques.

UNIT-I
Introduction to Pattern Recognition: Problems, applications, design cycle, learning and adaptation,
examples, Probability Distributions, Parametric Learning - Maximum likelihood and Bayesian Decision
Theory- Bayes rule, discriminant functions, loss functions and Bayesian error analysis

UNIT-II
Linear models: Linear Models for Regression, linear regression, logistic regression Linear Models for
Classification.
UNIT-III
Neural Network: perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, back propagation algorithm, error surfaces,
practical techniques for improving back propagation, additional networks and training methods,
Adaboost, Deep Learning
UNIT-IV
Linear discriminant functions - decision surfaces, two-category, multi-category, minimum-squared
error procedures, the Ho-Kashyap procedures, linear programming algorithms, Support vector machine

UNIT-V
Algorithm independent machine learning – lack of inherent superiority of any classifier, bias and
variance, re-sampling for classifier design, combining classifiers
Unsupervised learning and clustering – k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means clustering, hierarchical
clustering
Text Books :
1. Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition John
Wiley & Sons, 2001.
2.Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H. Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical
Learning”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2009.
3.C. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Study the parametric and linear models for classification

2. Design neural network and SVM for classification
3. Understand Linear discriminant functions
4. Develop machine independent and unsupervised learning techniques.

200
 Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO1
3 3 1 1 2
CO2
3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3
3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO4

201
 Courses offered for Minors in Electronics
ECMN01( EC 104)- Electronic Devices
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course develops a basic understanding of the fundamentals and principles of
analog and digital circuits and electronic devices. This understanding is a critical step towards being able
to design new electronic circuits or use them appropriately as part of a larger engineering system.
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the student with the principal of operation, analysis and design of junction diode,
BJT and FET transistors and amplifier circuits.
2. To understand diode as a rectifier.
3. To study basic principal of filter of circuits and various types

UNIT-I
Semiconductor Materials: Atomic structure, Electrons in periodic Lattices, Classifying Materials:
Semiconductors, conductors and insulators, Semiconductor material groups, Covalent bonding, Energy
Band gaps, Energy bands in intrinsic and extrinsic silicon /Germanium, Density of Impurity States,
Electrical Conductivity and Mobility, , Electronic Properties of N-type and P-type semiconductors,
Carrier transport: diffusion current, drift current, mobility and resistivity; sheet resistance, design of
resistors. Generation and recombination of carriers; Poisson and continuity equation, P-N junction
characteristics, I-V Characteristics, and small signal switching models, Diode resistances and diode
capacitances.
UNIT-II
Diode models, Avalanche breakdown, Zener diode, Schottky diode, Tunnel diode, Varactor diode and
their applications, Testing a diode.
Rectifiers: Diode equivalent circuits, Analysis of diode circuits, Characteristics and comparison of Half-
wave, Full-wave and Bridge rectifiers, Analysis of filters (C, L, LC, and CLC) used with Full-wave
rectifiers, line regulation and load regulation.
UNIT-III

Bipolar Junction Transistors: Bipolar Junction Transistor action, PNP and NPN transistors, CB, CE,
and CC configurations and their I-V characteristics, Analytical expressions for transistor characteristics,
Typical junction voltages and maximum ratings. Determination of h-parameters from BJT characteristics,
Ebers-Moll Model, Multi Emitter transistor.

UNIT-IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor Biasing: Operating point, stabilization, thermal runaway.
Field Effect Transistors: Characteristics and parameters of JFET, Pinch off and saturation regions, MOS
capacitor, Depletion and Enhancement type of MOSFET, I-V characteristics, and small signal models of
MOS transistor, UJT and its I-V characteristics, Metal Semiconductor FET, FET biasing schemes.

UNIT-V
Optoelectronic Devices: Principle of operation and characteristics of LED. LCD, LDR, Photoconductor,
Photodiode, Phototransistor, Solar cell, PIN photodiode, Charge-Coupled Devices, APD (avalanche
photodiode) and their applications.
Power Semiconductor Devices: Device structure, equivalent circuit and characteristics of PNPN Diode,
SCR, DIAC and TRIAC. .
Text Books :
1. 1.Ben G. Steetman and Sanjay Kumar Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition,

202
 Pearson Publishers, 2015.
2. Jacob Millman, Christos Halkias, Chetan D Parikh, “Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital
Circuits and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill Ed. Private Limited, 2011.
3. Allen Mottershead, “Electronic Devices and Circuits: An Introduction”, PHILearning , 2011.
4. D. Neamen , D. Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices", McGraw-Hill Education.
5. S. M. Sze and K. N. Kwok, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices,” 3rd edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2006.
6. C.T. Sah, “Fundamentals of solid state electronics,” World Scientific Publishing Co. Inc, 1991.
7. Y. Tsividis and M. Colin, “Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor,” Oxford University
Press, 2011.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the principles of semiconductor physics of the intrinsic, p and n type materials.
2. Understand the characteristics of the diode and some special function diodes and their application
in electronic circuits and rectifier circuits
3. Understand basics of transistors for circuits and systems.
4. Understand the characteristics of the Transistors biasing opto-electronic devices and Power
Semiconductor Devices and their application in electronic circuits.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - 1 - 1 - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 1 - 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - 1 1 1

203
 ECMN02( EC305C)- Digital Logic Design
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course develops a basic understanding of the fundamentals and principles of
Logic circuits and VLSI Design flow. This understanding is a critical step towards being able to design
new Logic circuits or use them appropriately as part of a larger engineering system
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the student with Basic Logic circuits and designing.
2. To learn the design concepts of MSI devices, Sequential Logic Design and VLSI Design flow.
UNIT I
Logic Simplification and Combinational Logic Design: Review of Boolean Algebra and De Morgan’s
Theorem, SOP & POS forms, Canonical forms, Karnaugh maps up to 6 variables, Binary codes, Code
Conversion.
UNIT II
MSI devices like Comparators, Multiplexers, Encoder, Decoder, Driver & Multiplexed Display, Half
and Full Adders, Subtractors, Serial and Parallel Adders, BCD Adder, Barrel shifter and ALU.

UNIT III
Sequential Logic Design: Building blocks like S-R, JK and Master-Slave JK FF, Edge triggered FF,
Ripple and Synchronous counters, Shift registers, Finite state machines, Design of synchronous FSM,
Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous circuits like Pulse train generator,
Pseudorandom Binary Sequence generator.
UNIT IV
Clock generation Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications,
Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS families and their
interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like FPGA. Logic
implementation using Programmable Devices.
UNIT V
VLSI Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles in VHDL, Data
types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis and Simulation VHDL
constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.

Text / Reference Books:

1. R.P. Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2009.
2. Douglas Perry, “VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002.
3. W.H. Gothmann, “Digital Electronics- An introduction to theory and practice”, PHI, 2nd
Edition,2006.
4. D.V. Hall, “Digital Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989
5. Charles Roth, “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition
2012.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Design and analyze combinational logic circuits.
2. Design & analyze modular combinational circuits with MUX/DEMUX, Decoder, Encoder.
3. Design & analyze synchronous sequential logic circuits.
4. Use HDL & appropriate EDA tools for digital logic design and simulation

204
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - 2 - 1 - - 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - 2 - 1 - 1 1

205
 ECMN03( EC306C )- Analog Circuits
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course develops a basic understanding of the fundamentals and principles of
analog circuits and electronic devices in electrical and electronic engineering.
Course Objectives:
1. To specify the small signal equivalent model of transistors
2. To analyze transistor amplifier circuits
3. To design multistage transistor amplifier circuits
4. To identify and discuss operating principles of differential amplifiers
5. To design and analyze integrated circuit biasing
6. To analyze frequency response of linear amplifiers

UNIT-I
General Amplifiers Characteristics: Concept of Amplifier, Voltage gain, Current gain, Power gain,
Input and Output resistances, Conversion efficiency, Frequency response, Bandwidth, Distortion,
BJT Amplifiers: Small signal low frequency model of the transistor, Analysis of CE, CB and CC
amplifiers, Approximate model analysis, Effects of coupling and bypass capacitors on low frequency
response, Hybrid-Π model at high frequencies, Calculation of High-Frequency parameters in terms of
Low Frequency parameters, CE short circuit gain, CE current gain with resistive load.
UNIT-II
FET Amplifiers: Small signal model, Analysis of CS, CD and CG amplifiers, comparison of
performance of the three configurations, High frequency FET circuits, CS amplifier at high frequencies,
CD amplifier at high frequencies.
Multistage Amplifiers: Types of coupling, Choice of amplifier configuration, overall voltage gain and
Bandwidth of n-stage amplifier, Darlington and Bootstrap circuits.
UNIT-III
Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, Classification, Effects of negative feedback on gain, Stability,
Noise, Distortion, Bandwidth, input resistance and output resistance.
Oscillators: Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase shift, Wien bridge
etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), Crystal oscillators.

UNIT-IV
Power Amplifiers: Series-Fed Class-A power amplifiers, Transformer coupled class-A power amplifiers,
Push-pull amplifiers, Class-B amplifiers, Class-AB operation, Complementary symmetry Push-Pull class-
B Power amplifiers
Current mirror: Basic topology and its variants, V-I characteristics, output resistance and minimum
sustainable voltage (VON), maximum usable load

UNIT-V
Differential amplifier: Basic structure and principle of operation, calculation of differential gain,
common mode gain, CMRR, circuits to improve CMRR, transfer characteristics.
Operational Amplifier: Ideal op-amp characteristics, Op-amp internal circuit, examples of IC op-amps,
DC and AC characteristics, Inverting and non-inverting modes of operation, voltage follower.
Text Books :
1. Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, McGraw-Hill Co
2. Mottershed, “Electronic devices and circuits”, PHI
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, Microelectronics, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, 1988.
4. Salivahanan, “Electronic Devices and circuits”, TMH.
5. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and circuits”, PHI
6. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Bala Jain, “Linear Integrated circuits”, New Age International publishers,

206
 2018.
7. J.V. Wait, L.P. Huelsman and GA Korn, Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and
applications, McGraw Hill, 1992.
8. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, The Art of Electronics, 2nd edition, Cambridge University Press, 1989.
9. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Saunder's College Publishing, IV
Edition.
10. Paul R. Gray and Robert G.Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, John
Wiley, 3rd Edition.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Design and analyze various amplifier circuits.

2. Design sinusoidal oscillators.
3. Understand the functioning Power Amplifiers, Differential amplifier..
4. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 2 - -
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -
CO4 3 2 3 2 1 - - 1 1 - - 1 - 1

207
 ECMN04( EC404C ) - IC Applications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: The main aim of this lab is to teach the linear and non-linear applications of
operational amplifiers (741). Students are made familiar with theory and applications of 555 timers.
Students are made to Design combinational logic circuits using digital ICs.
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits.
2. To teach the linear and non - linear applications of operational amplifiers
3. To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL.
4. To understand and implement the working of basic digital circuits
UNIT-I
Op-Amp Applications: Scale changer/inverter, Summing amplifier, Instrumentation amplifier,
Instrumentation amplifier IC-AD620, DC and AC amplifiers, V to I and I to V converters, Precision
rectifiers, Log and Antilog amplifiers, multiplier and divider, Analog multiplier IC-AD633,
Differentiator, Integrator, Analog computation.

. UNIT-II
Comparators and waveform generators: Comparator, Regenerative comparator (Schmitt Trigger),
Astable and mono-stable multi-vibrators using op-amp, Triangular wave generator, Sine wave generators
using op-amp. IC waveform generator (8038).

UNIT-III
Voltage regulators: Series op-amp regulator, IC voltage regulators, 723 General purpose regulator,
Switching regulators.
Active filters: Low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject and all pass filters, transformation, State
variable filter, Switched capacitor filters, Switched capacitor filter ICs.

UNIT-IV
555 Timer: Description of functional diagram, Monostable operation. Applications in monostable mode,
Astable operation, Applications in astable mode, Schmitt trigger.
Phase Locked Loops: PLL- introduction, block schematic, principles and description individual blocks,
IC PLL (565), Voltage controlled oscillator (566), PLL applications- Frequency multiplication, Frequency
translation, FM & FSK demodulation.
UNIT-V
D-A and A-D Converters: Basic DAC Techniques, Weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder DAC, Inverted
R-2R ladder, Monolithic DAC IC-1409, A-D converters, direct type ADCs, the parallel comparator(flash)
A/D converter, The counter type A/D converter, Servo tracking A/D converter, Successive approximation
converter, Integrating type of ADCs, Charge balancing ADC, Dual-slope ADC, DAC/ADC
specifications.

Text Books :
1. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Bala Jain, “Linear Integrated circuits”, New Age International
publishers, 2018.
2. Ramakant A.Gayakward, “Op-amps and linear Integrated circuits”, LPE, 4th edition, Pearson
Education.
3. S.Salivahanan, V.S.Kanchana Bhaaskaran “Linear Integrated circuits”, TMH, 2008.
4. David A. Bell, “Operational amplifiers and Linear ICs”, PHI, EEE, 1997.
5. J.V. Wait, L.P. Huelsman and GA Korn, Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and
applications, McGraw Hill, 1992. Sons, 1975.

208
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits.

2. Understand the functioning of voltage regulators and design IC based voltage regulators,
3. Understand the functioning of 555 timer and design 555 timer based circuits.
4. Understand the functioning of PLL and design PLL based circuits.
5. Design ADC and DAC circuits.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1 -
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 2 - -
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - -
CO4 3 2 3 2 1 - - 1 1 - - 1 - 1

209
 ECMN05( EC604C-Program Elective-II )- Electronic Instrumentation

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course deals with the basics of electronic instruments used in laboratory and
industry. In the process they learn different type of instruments like voltmeter, ammeter, Q meter,
Bridges, transducers and display devices CRO, CRT. After learning this subject student will be master in
working principle and application of all types of instruments.
Course Objectives:
1. To explain basic concepts and definitions in measurement.
2. To describe the bridge configurations and their applications.
3. To understand, design aspects and performance criterion of measuring instruments.
4. To understand the working principle of various transducers.

UNIT-I
Measurement and Error: Definitions, accuracy and precision, types of errors.
DC Ammeters, DC Voltmeters, Series type ohmmeter, Shunt type ohmmeter. AC Voltmeter using
rectifiers, True RMS responding voltmeter. Analog Instruments – Transistor voltmeter, micro voltmeter
(chopper type) - DC differential voltmeter - AC voltmeters.

UNIT-II
Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes : Motion of electron in electric field and in magnetic field – Block diagram of
CRO, CRT, Electrostatic deflection sensitivity – Vertical and Horizontal deflection systems – Principle of
operation of Dual beam, Digital, Dual trace, Sampling and Storage CROs – Measurements with CRO
(voltage, current, time, frequency, phase angle, Lissajous figures).

UNIT-III
Q meter and measurement methods.
Bridges: Wheatstone, Kelvin’s, Maxwell, Hay and Schering bridges.
Wave analyzers (AF & RF) - Harmonic distortion analyzers – Spectrum analyzer.

UNIT-IV
Digital instruments – Digital voltmeters (Ramp, Dual slope, stair case, successive approximation types)
Digital Multimeter, universal counter, Digital tachometer, Digital phase meter IEEE 488 Bus.

UNIT-V
Transducers – Classification and selection of transducers – strain gauges – Temperature measurement
(resistance thermometer, thermo couples and thermistors) LVDT – Peizo electric transducer..
Text Books :
1. 1. H.S.Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation” TMH, 1995.
2. Helfric and Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”,
PHI, 1995.
3. A.K.Sawhney , " Electrical and electronic measurements and instrumentation", Danapat
Rai & Co.,18th edition., 2007.
E-resources and other digital material
1.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106070
2.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106070

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

210
 1. Emphasize the basic electronics measurement concepts & Design the different analog and digital
electronics voltmeters
2. Identify and use different analyzers oscilloscopes.
3. Design the Measurement of different bridges& generators to make measurements and analyze
measurement.
4. Analyze the concepts of Transducers based on application

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 1

211
 ECMN06( EC603C --Program Elective-I )- CMOS VLSI Design
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This is an introductory course that covers basic theories and techniques of digital
VLSI design in CMOS technology. In this course, we will study the fundamental concepts and structures
of designing digital VLSI systems including CMOS devices and circuits, standard CMOS fabrication
processes, CMOS design rules, static and dynamic logic structures, interconnect analysis, CMOS chip
layout, simulation and testing, low power techniques, design tools and methodologies, VLSI architecture.
Prerequisite Courses: Electronic Devices, Analog Circuits and Digital Logic Design.
Course Objectives:
1. To learn basic CMOS Circuits.
2. To learn CMOS process technology.
3. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices.
4. To learn the concepts of designing VLSI Subsystems
UNIT-I
Integrated circuit fabrication process: oxidation, diffusion, ion implantation, photolithography and
twin-tub CMOS process.
Brief Introduction to MOS, PMOS, NMOS, CMOS & BiCMOS technologies. Review of MOS transistor
models, Non-ideal behavior of the MOS Transistor, Ids – Vds relationships, MOS transistor threshold
Voltage, Transistor as a switch, Inverter characteristics.

UNIT-II
Integrated Circuit Layout: VLSI Design Flow, MOS Layers, Stick Diagrams, Design Rules and Layout,
CMOS Design rules for wires, Contacts and Transistors Layout Diagrams for CMOS Inverters and Gates,
Scaling of MOS circuits.
Basic Circuit Concepts: Sheet Resistance Rs and its concepts to MOS, Area Capacitance calculations,
Inverter Delays, driving large Capacitive Loads, Wiring Capacitances. Delay: RC Delay model, linear
delay model, logical path efforts. Power, interconnect and Robustness in CMOS circuit layout
UNIT-III
Combinational Circuit Design: CMOS logic families including static, dynamic and dual rail logic,
Switch logic, Alternate gate circuits. Shifters, Adders, Parity generators, Comparators, Zero/One
Detectors, Binary Counters, ALUs, Multipliers, Counters, High Density Memory Elements.

UNIT-IV
Sequential Circuit Design: Static Circuits, Design of latches and Flip-flops.
Test and Testability: Fault-modeling and simulation, test generation, design for testability, Built-in-self-
test.
UNIT-V
Physical Design: Floor-Planning, Placement, routing, Power delay estimation, Clock and Power
routing.
Design styles: Full-custom, Standard Cells, Gate-arrays, FPGAs, CPLDs and Design Approach for Full-
custom and Semi-custom devices. .
Text Books :
1. 1 Neil H.E. Weste and David Money Harris, CMOS VLSI design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective, 4th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2015.
2. Kamran Eshraghian, Eshraghian Douglas and A. Pucknell, Essentials of VLSI circuits and
systems, PHI, 2005 Edition.
3. John M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2016.

212
 Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Learn CMOS process technology.

2. Analyze and implement various CMOS static logic circuits using Lambda based design rules.
3. Design different CMOS circuits using various logic families along with their circuit layouts for
subsystem design.
4. To learn techniques of chip design using programmable devices and use HDL tools for designing
VLSI Subsystems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 - - - - -
CO2 2 1 3 - - 1
CO3 2 3 - - - - -
CO4 2 1 - - - - - 1

213
 Courses offered for Minors in Communications
ECMN11((EC303C))- Signals and Systems

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course focuses on analyzing signals (sound, voltage, communication
transmissions, pressure, images, etc.) and the systems that act on them (circuits, physical echos,
mechanical dynamics, modulation, etc.). We concentrate on the Fourier transform and linear-time
invariant systems, providing a depth of tools for sampling, manipulating, preserving, and interpreting
information signals
Course Objectives:
1. To represent and classify signal and systems.
2. Represent and apply singularity functions.
3. Obtain the response of a continuous, linear, time-invariant, causal system by using convolution.
4. Obtain the Fourier series expansion of a periodic signal and apply it to continuous, linear, time-
invariant systems.
5. Obtain and plot the Fourier transform for simple a periodic continuous-time signals.
UNIT-I
Introduction to Signals and Systems:
Definition and classification of signals and systems as seen in everyday life, and in various branches of
engineering and science. Signal properties: periodicity, absolute integrability, determinism and
stochastic character, Elementary signals such as Impulse, step, ramp, sinusoidal and exponential
signals, Operations on signals. Basic System Properties (Continuous-Time and Discrete-Time):
linearity: additivity and homogeneity, shift-invariance, causality, stability, realizability, Examples,
Causal LTI Systems Described by Differential and Difference Equations.
Signal Analysis:
Analogy between vectors and signals, Orthogonal signal space, Signal approximation using orthogonal
functions, Mean square error, Closed or complete set of orthogonal functions, Orthogonality in
complex functions.
UNIT-II
Fourier series and Fourier Transform:
The Response of LTI Systems to Complex Exponentials. Fourier series Representation of Continuous-
Time Periodic Signals, Convergence of the Fourier series, Properties of Continuous-Time Fourier
Series. The Continuous-Time Fourier Transform – properties. Discrete-Time Fourier Transform –
Properties, Basic Fourier Transform Pairs. Introduction to Hilbert Transform.
UNIT-III
Convolution and Correlation of Signals:
Concept of convolution in time domain and frequency domain, Graphical representation of
convolution, Convolution property of Fourier transforms, Cross correlation and auto correlation of
functions, properties of correlation function, Energy density spectrum, Parseval’s theorem, Power
density spectrum, Relation between auto correlation function and energy/power spectral density
function. Relation between convolution and correlation, Detection of periodic signals in the presence
of noise by correlation, Extraction of signal from noise by filtering.
UNIT-IV
Behaviour of continuous and discrete-time LTI systems:

214
The Magnitude-Phase Representation of the Fourier Transform, The Magnitude-Phase Representation
of the Frequency Response of LTI Systems, Distortion less transmission through a system, signal
bandwidth, system bandwidth, Ideal LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, Causality and Poly-Wiener
criterion for physical realization, relationship between bandwidth and rise time, State-space
Representation of systems, State-Space Analysis, Multi-input, multi-output representation.
Sampling and Reconstruction:
The Sampling Theorem and its implications, Spectra of sampled signals, Reconstruction: ideal
interpolator, zero-order hold, first-order hold, Aliasing and its effects. Relation between continuous and
discrete time systems, Introduction to the applications of signal and system theory: modulation for
communication, filtering, feedback control systems.
UNIT-V
The Laplace Transform -The Region of Convergence - Properties, The Inverse Laplace Transform,
Laplace Transform Pairs, Analysis and Characterization of LTI Systems Using the Laplace Transform,
Unilateral Laplace Transform. The Z-Transform -Region of Convergence - Properties, The Inverse z-
Transform, Common z-Transform Pairs, Analysis and Characterization of LTI Systems Using z-
Transforms, Unilateral z-Transform.

Text Books :
1. 1.Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky, & S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems,” Pearson
Higher Education, 2nd Ed., 1997.
2. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms, and
Applications”, Pearson, 2006.
3. Simon Haykin and B. Van Veen, “Signals & Systems,” John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition,
2007.
4. B.P. Lathi, “Principles of LINEAR SYSTEMS and SIGNALS,” Oxford Univ. Press, Second
Edition, International version, 2009.
5. H. P. Hsu, “Signals and systems”, Schaum’s series, McGraw Hill Education, 2010.
6. Luis F. Chaparro, “Signals and Systems using MATLAB,” Academic Press, 2011.
7. C. L. Philips, J. M. Parr and Eve A. Riskin, “Signals, Systems and Transforms,” Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2008.
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Analyze different types of signals
2. Understand the concepts of continuous time and discrete time systems.
3. Analyze systems in complex frequency domain.
4. Investigate whether the system is stable or not.
5. Understand sampling theorem and its implications
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 1 --
CO2 -- 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 2 -- 2 -- 1
CO3 2 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 1 --
CO4 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 1

215
 ECMN12( EC402C )- Probability theory & Stochastic Process
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course explanations and expositions of probability and stochastic processes
concepts which they need for their experiments and research. It also covers theoretical concepts of
probability and stochastic processes pertaining to handling various stochastic modeling.
Course Objectives:
1. To provide mathematical background and sufficient experience so that student can read, write
and understand sentences in the language of probability theory.
2. To introduce students to the basic methodology of “probabilistic thinking” and apply it to
problems.
3. To understand basic concepts of Probability theory and Random Variables, how to deal with
multiple Random Variables.
4. To understand the difference between time averages statistical averages

UNIT-I
Sets and set operations, Probability space, Conditional probability Total Probability, and Bayes
theorem, Combinatorial probability and sampling models.

Discrete random variables, probability mass function, probability distribution function, example
random variables and distributions. Continuous random variables, probability density function,
probability distribution function, example distributions
UNIT-II
Joint distributions, functions of one and two random variables, moments of random variables;
Conditional distribution, densities and moments, Characteristic functions of a random variable;
Markov, Chebyshev and Chernoff bounds.
UNIT-III
Random sequences and modes of convergence (everywhere, almost everywhere, probability, distribution and
mean square); Limit theorems; Strong and weak laws of large numbers, Central Limit Theorem, (Proof not
expected), Transformations of Multiple Random Variables, Linear Transformations of Gaussian Random
Variables.
UNIT-IV
Random Process: Classification of Processes, Stationary processes, Mean and covariance functions,
Time Averages and Ergodicity, Mean-Ergodic Processes, Correlation-Ergodic Processes,
Autocorrelation Function & Its Properties, Cross-Correlation Function & its Properties, Covariance
Functions, Gaussian Random Processes, Poisson Random Process.
Power spectral density, Properties, Relationship between Power Spectrum and Autocorrelation
Function, The Cross-Power Density Spectrum, Properties, Relationship between Cross-Power
Spectrum and Cross-Correlation Function.
UNIT-V
Transmission of random process through LTI systems: System Response – Convolution, Mean and Mean-
squared Value of System Response, autocorrelation Function of Response, Cross-Correlation Functions of
Input and Output, Spectral Characteristics of System Response: Power Density Spectrum of Response, Cross-
Power Density Spectrums of Input and Output, properties of white noise, Band pass, Band-Limited and
Narrowband Processes, Properties

216
Text Books :
1. H. Stark and J. Woods, “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education.
2. Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishnan Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and
Stochastic Processes”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
3. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2001.
4. K. L. Chung, Introduction to Probability Theory with Stochastic Processes, Springer
International.
5. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Probability, UBS Publishers.
6. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Stochastic Processes, UBS Publishers.
7. S. Ross, Introduction to Stochastic Models, Harcourt Asia, Academic Press.
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Understand representation of random signals.

2. Investigate characteristics of random processes.
3. Make use of theorems related to random signals.
4. Able to Model of different Noise Sources and to understand propagation of random signals in
LTI systems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 1 --
CO2 -- 1 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- 2 -- 2 -- 1
CO3 2 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 2 1 --
CO4 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 1

217
 ECMN13 ( EC405C)- Analog Communications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: This course gives concepts of Different Analog communications which they
need for their experiments and research.
Course Objectives: To understand
1. The concepts of various Amplitude, Angle and Pulse Modulation schemes and information
theory with random processes.
2. The working principle of Radio Receivers

. Unit – I
Introduction: Elements of communication systems, Information, Messages and Signals, Modulation,
Modulation Methods, Modulation Benefits and Applications.
Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation: Baseband and carrier communication, Amplitude
Modulation
(AM), Rectifier detector, Envelope detector, Double sideband suppressed carrier (DSB-SC)
modulation & its demodulation, Switching modulators, Ring modulator, Balanced modulator,
Frequency mixer, sideband and carrier power of AM, Generation of AM signals, Single sideband
(SSB) transmission, Time domain representation of SSB signals & their demodulation schemes (with
carrier, and suppressed carrier), Generation of SSB signals, Vestigial sideband (VSB) modulator &
demodulator, Frequency division multiplexing (FDM), Illustrative Problems.
UNIT-II
Angle Modulation & Demodulation: Concept of instantaneous frequency, Generalized concept of
angle
modulation- Frequency Modulation & Phase modulation : Bandwidth of angle modulated waves,
Narrow band frequency modulation (NBFM) and Wide band FM (WBFM), Verification of Frequency
modulation bandwidth relationship, Features of angle modulation, Generation of FM waves-Indirect
method, Direct generation; Demodulation of FM, Band pass limiter, Practical frequency
demodulators, Small error analysis, Pre-emphasis, & De-emphasis filters, FM Capture Effect,
Illustrative Problems.
UNIT-III
Noise in Communication Systems: Thermal noise, Time domain representation of narrowband noise,
filtered white noise, Quadrature representation of narrowband noise, Envelope of narrowband noise
plus sine wave, Signal to noise ratio & probability of error, Noise equivalent bandwidth, Effective
noise temperature, and Noise figure, Baseband systems with channel noise, Performance analysis (i.e.
finding SNR expression) of AM, DSBSC, SSB-SC, FM, PM in the presence of noise, Illustrative
Problems.
UNIT-IV
Radio Receivers: Working principle of Super heterodyne AM and FM Receivers along with suitable
block diagrams, Sensitivity, Selectivity and fidelity.
Analog Pulse Modulation Schemes: Pulse amplitude modulation – Natural sampling, flat top sampling
and Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) & demodulation, Pulse-Time Modulation – Pulse Duration
and Pulse Position modulations, and demodulation schemes, PPM spectral analysis, Illustrative
Problems.
UNIT-V

218
Information Theory: Introduction, Information and Entropy, and its properties, source coding
Theorem, Data Compaction – Prefix coding, Huffman coding, Discrete Memory less channels, Mutual
Information, and its properties, Channel capacity, Channel coding Theorem, Application to binary
symmetric channels, differential entropy and mutual information, Information capacity theorem,
implication of information capacity theorem, Rate Distortion, Illustrative problems
Text Books:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” Oxford Univ. press, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,” by John Wiley & Sons,3rdEdition, 2010.
3. Sham Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley-India edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals &
Noise in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.
2. Herbert Taub&Donald L Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 3rd Edition, 2009.
3. . R.E. Ziemer& W.H. Tranter, “Principles of Communication-Systems Modulation & Noise”,
Jaico Publishing House, 5thedition, 2001.
4. George Kennedy and Bernard Davis, “Electronics & Communication System”, TMH,2004.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the concepts of various Amplitude, Angle and Pulse Modulation schemes and
information theory with random processes and to solve problems in analog and pulse
modulation schemes
2. Analysis of analog communication system in the presence of noise.
3. Compare and contrast design issues, advantages, disadvantages and limitations of various
modulation schemes in analog communication systems.
4. Solve basic communication problems & calculate information rate and channel capacity of a
discrete communication channel.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 1 --
CO2 3 1 2 -- 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 -- 2 -- 1
CO3 2 2 2 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- 2 2 1 --
CO4 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- 1

219
 ECMN14( EC505C) - Digital Communications
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description:
This course provides an introduction to voice and data networking technologies, including public and pri
vate voice services, Ethernet and Internet data technologies, network security, business applications and
network management. The structure, regulation, andhistory of the telecom and data network industry wil
l be discussed as well.
Course Objectives:
1. To protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale.
2. To routing, transport, DNS resolutions
3. To network extensions and next generation architecture.
UNIT I
Source Coding Systems: Sampling, Quantization, Quantization noise, Encoding, Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM), Line codes, Regeneration, Decoding and Filtering, Noise considerations in PCM systems, Time-
Division Multiplexing (TDM), Synchronization, Differential encoding, Delta modulation (DM),
Differential Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM), Processing gain, Adaptive Delta Modulation (ADM).

UNIT II
Introduction to Baseband Pulse Transmission, Matched filter and it’s Properties,Matched filter for
rectangular pulse, Error rate due to noise, Inter-symbol Interference (ISI), Nyquist’s criterion for
distortion less baseband binary transmission, Duo binary, Modified duo binary in Correlative-level
coding, Baseband M-array PAM transmission, Eye diagrams.

UNIT III
Signal Space Analysis: Introduction, Geometric representation of signals, Gram-Schmidt
Orthogonalization procedure, Conversion of the Continuous AWGN channel into a vectorchannel,
Coherent detection of signals in noise, Correlation receiver, Probability of error.

UNIT IV
Passband Data Transmission: Introduction, Passband transmission model, ASK, Coherent Phase Shift
Keying – Binary phase shift keying (BPSK), Quadrature shift keying (QPSK), Binary Frequency shift
keying (BFSK), M-array Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (M-array QAM), Non-coherent orthogonal
modulation schemes-Differential PSK, Non-Coherent Binary FSK.
(Error probability, Generation and Detection, Power spectra, signal constellation diagram of above
schemes)
UNIT-V
Error Control Coding: Repetition & Parity Check Codes, Interleaving, Code Vectors and Hamming
Distance, Forward Error Correction (FEC)Systems, Linear Block Codes, Cyclic Codes, Convolutional
Encoding methods- Code Tree, Trellis and State Diagram, Decoding Methods- Sequential, Viterbi.
Text Books :
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems,” by John Wiley & Sons,3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Wiley-India edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” Oxford Univ. press, 3rd
Edition, 2006.
2. J.S. Chithode, “Digital Communications”, Technical Publications, Ist Edition, 2020

220
 3. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals &
Noise in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Understand the Digital communication System and able to analyse the different Digital
modulation techniques.
2. Understand the concepts of baseband digital modulation schemes and Inter Symbol Interference.
3. Analyze Signal space concepts, probability of error performance of various digital binary
modulation systems and are able to design digital communication systems.
4. Design a system with Error correcting codes by learning Block Codes, Cyclic Codes and
Convolution Codes.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3
CO3 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 1 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2

221
 ECMN15( EC504C) Antenna Wave Propagation
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: Antennas and propagation effects play a crucial role in RF systems. In practice,
the design of a working system such as mobile phone networks, WiFi, RFID, Satellite communication
and GPS requires a good understanding of these components. This course teaches the fundamentals of
antenna and propagation and shows the application in practical examples. The course covers the theory
of radiation, fundamental antenna parameters and concepts, wire antennas such as dipoles and loop
antennas, antenna arrays, aperture antennas, microstrip antennas, numerical analysis, communication &
radar systems and propagation effects.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the concept of radiation, antenna definitions and significance of antenna
parameters, to derive and analyze the radiation characteristics of thin wire dipole antennas and
solve numerical problems.
2. To analyse the characteristics and design relations of UHF, VHF and Microwave Antennas.
3. To identify the antenna array requirements, to determine the characteristics of ULAs and
estimate the patterns of BSA, EFA, and Binomial Arrays.
4. To understand the concepts and set-up requirements for microwave measurements, and
familiarize with the procedure to enable antenna measurements.
5. To define and distinguish between different phenomenon of wave propagation (ground wave,
space wave and sky wave), their frequency dependence, and estimate their characteristics,
identifying their profiles and parameters involved.

UNIT-I
Antenna Basics: Basic Antenna Parameters – Patterns, Beam Area, Radiation Intensity, Beam
Efficiency, Directivity-Gain-Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Effective Height. Fields from Oscillating
Dipole, Field Zones, Front - to-back Ratio, Antenna Theorems, Radiation,
Retarded Potentials–Helmholtz Theorem
Thin Linear Wire Antennas – Radiation from Small Electric Dipole, Quarter Wave Monopole and Half
Wave Dipole – Current Distributions, Field Components, Radiated Power, Radiation Resistance, Beam
Width, Directivity, Effective Area and Effective Height, Natural Current Distributions, Far Fields and
Patterns of Thin Linear Centre-fed Antennas of Different Lengths. Loop Antennas.

UNIT-II
Antenna Arrays: Point Sources – Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic Sources - Different Cases,
Principle of Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside Arrays, End fire Arrays, EFA
with Increased Directivity, Derivation of their Characteristics and Comparison, BSAs with Non-uniform
Amplitude Distributions – General Considerations and Binomial Arrays.

UNIT-III
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - I: Arrays with Parasitic Elements, Yagi-Uda Array, Folded
Dipoles and their Characteristics, Helical Antennas – Helical Geometry, Helix Modes, Practical Design

222
Considerations for Monofilar Helical Antenna in Axial and Normal Modes, Horn Antennas –
Types,Fermat’s Principle, Optimum Horns, Design Considerations of Pyramidal Horns.
UNIT-IV
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - II: Microstrip Antennas – Introduction, Features, Advantages
and Limitations, Rectangular Patch Antennas – Geometry and Parameters, Characteristics of Microstrip
Antennas. Reflector Antennas – Introduction, Flat Sheet and Corner Reflectors, Paraboloidal Reflectors
– Geometry, Pattern Characteristics, Feed Methods, Reflector Types – Related Features.
UNIT-V
Ground Wave Propagation –Plane Earth Reflections, Space and Surface Waves, Wave Tilt, Curved
Earth Reflections. Space Wave Propagation –Field Strength Variation with Distance and Height, Effect
of Earth’s Curvature, Absorption, Super Refraction, M-Curves and Duct Propagation, Scattering
phenomena, Troposphere Propagation. Sky Wave Propagation –Structure of Ionosphere, Refraction and
Reflection of Sky Waves by Ionosphere, Ray Path, Critical Frequency, MUF, LUF, OF, Virtual Height
and Skip Distance, Relation between MUF and Skip Distance, Multi-hop Propagation.
Text Books :
1. Antennas and Wave Propagation – J.D. Kraus, R.J. Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, TMH,
New Delhi, 4th ed., (Special Indian Edition), 2010.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, PHI, 2nd
edition,2000.
3. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Ed., 2005.
4.. Antennas and Wave Propagation – K.D. Prasad, Satya Prakashan, Tech India
Publications,New Delhi, 2001..
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Understand the basic parameters of antenna (L1) and apply the concepts to various antennas
based on frequency, configuration and establish the radiation patterns of antenna arrays (L2)
2. Analysis of VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas (L3)
3. Design and analysis of microstrip antennas (L4)
4. To understand the wave propagation in different frequency ranges (L5)
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 2 1 - 1 - 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 - 1 1 2 3

223
 ECMN16( ( EC601C )- Microwave Engineering

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: The course will be broadly focusing on analysis, design and development of
microwave circuits and systems. The course will cover introduction to Microwaves, Microwave
transmission modes, Transmission lines, Impedance Matching, Microwave Network Analysis,
Directional Coupler, Power Divider, Microwave Filters, Microwave Attenuator, RF switches and phase
shifters, Microwave Amplifiers, Low Noise Amplifier, Microwave Mixers and Oscillators, Microwave
Antennas, Microwave Measurements, Microwave Systems.
Course Objectives:
1. To get familiarized with microwave frequency bands, their applications and to understand
the limitations and losses of conventional tubes at these frequencies.
2. To distinguish between different types of microwave tubes, their structures and principles of
microwave power generation.
3. To impart the knowledge of Scattering Matrix, its formulation and utility, and establish the
S-Matrix for various types of microwave junctions.
4. Understand the utility of Optical Fibres in Communications
UNIT – I
Microwave Tubes: Limitations and Losses of conventional Tubes at Microwave frequencies,
Cavity Klystrons – Structure, Re-entrant Cavities, Velocity Modulation Process, Applegate Diagram,
Bunching Process and Small Signal Theory – Expressions for O/P Power and Efficiency. Reflex
Klystrons – Structure, Velocity Modulation and Applegate Diagram, Mathematical Theory of
Bunching, Power Output, Efficiency, Oscillating Modes and O/P Characteristics. Helix TWTs: Types
and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT and Amplification Process(qualitative
treatment), Suppression of Oscillations, Gain Considerations.
UNIT - II
M-Type Tubes: Introduction, Cross-field Effects, Magnetrons – Different Types, Cylindrical Traveling
Wave Magnetron – Hull Cut-off and Hartree Conditions, Modes of Resonance and PI-Mode Operation,
Separation of PI-Mode, o/p characteristics,
Microwave Solid State Devices: Introduction, Classification, Applications. Gunn Diodes – Principle,
RWH Theory, Characteristics, Modes of Operation - Gunn Oscillation Modes, Principle of operation of
IMPATT and TRAPATT Devices.
UNIT - III
Waveguide Components: Coupling Mechanisms – Probe, Loop, Aperture types. Waveguide
Discontinuities – Waveguide Windows, Tuning Screws and Posts, Matched Loads. Waveguide
Attenuators – Different Types, Resistive Card and Rotary Vane Attenuators; Waveguide Phase Shifters
– Types, Dielectric and Rotary Vane Phase Shifters, Waveguide Multiport Junctions - E plane and H
plane Tees. Ferrites– Composition and Characteristics, Faraday Rotation, Ferrite Components –
Gyrator, Isolator.
UNIT – IV
Scattering matrix: Importance of S-matrix, Scattering Matrix Properties, Directional Couplers – 2 Hole,
Bethe Hole S Parameters, [s] matrix of Magic Tee and Circulator, Measurement of S-parameters.
MICs : Advantages of MIC’s, Hybrid MIC’s, Strip lines and microstrip lines, Monolithic MICs

224
 UNIT V
Microwave Measurements: Description of Microwave Bench – Different Blocks and their Features,
Errors and Precautions, Measurement of Attenuation, Frequency. Standing Wave Measurements,
Measurement of Low and High VSWR., Cavity Q-factor and Impedance Measurements. Antenna gain
measurements.
Text Books :
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits – Samuel Y. Liao, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2003.
2. Electronic Communications Systems- Wayne Tomasi, Pearson, 5th Edition
3. Microwave Engineering - David M. Pozar, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd., 1989, 3r ed.,
2011 4t.
4. Microwave Engineering - G.S. Raghuvanshi, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2012
5. Kulkarni, “Microwave and Radar Engineering”, Umesh publications, 1998.
6. Annapurna Das and Sisir K.Das, “Microwave Engineering” Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2000.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Known power generation at microwave frequencies and derive the performance characteristics.
(L2)
2. Understand the principles of solid state devices. (L1)
3. Distinguish between the different types of waveguide and ferrite components, and select proper
components for engineering applications (L4)
4. Understand the utility of S-parameters in microwave component design (L3) and to know the
measurement procedure of various microwave parameters. (L5)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3

225
 ECMN17(EC602C-)- Computer Networks
Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3
Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: : Computer Networks plays an vital role in the era of communication systems in
resources sharing applications. The aim of this course is to introduce the concepts of Computer
networking and its applications.
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge in developing different applications
1. To understand the basic concepts of computer networks and internet
2. To gain knowledge about the design issues of link layer and internet layer
3. To gain knowledge about the concept of connection oriented and connection less Protocols.
Unit -I
Introduction to Computer Networks and the Internet: Principles of network applications and Internet
Challenges &Layering concepts.
OSI Reference Model & TCP/IP Reference Model.

Unit -II
Link layer: ALOHA, Multiple access protocols, IEEE 802 standards, Local Area Networks, Ethernet,
Wireless LAN,Flow Control, Error Detection and Error Correction.

Unit -III
Internet Layer:
IP Addressing, IP Protocol, Routing Algorithms, queuing disciplines.
Congestion Control Algorithms, Resource Reservation ,Admission Control and Differentiated services

Unit -IV
Transport Layer: User Datagram Protocol, Connection oriented transport protocol– Transmission
Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Port Addressing and Socket Programming.
Unit –V

Application layer: The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, File transfer, Electronic mail, Domain
name system, Peer-to-Peer file sharing,JPEG,MPEG .
Network Security: DES & RSA
Text Books :
1. J.F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, 1.“Computer Networking – A top down approach Pearson
Education, 5th Edition
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall India Fourth Edition.
3. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition
4. D. Comer, “Computer Networks and Internet/TCP-IP”, Prentice Hall
5. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice
Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Design of computer networks in Internet.

226
 2. Understand the concepts of error handling ,flow control ,IP Addressing and Routing.
3. Understand the concept of TCP and UDP protocols.
4. Develop several protocols foe web Applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 _ 3 3
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 _ 1
CO3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 _ 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 _ 3 _

227
 ECMN18( EC604C-Program Elective-II)- Cyber Security

Instruction: Hours/Week: 3L:0T:0P Credits: 3

Sessional Marks: 40 End Semester Examination Marks: 60
Course Description: The course deals with the underlying principles of cryptography and network
security. It develops the mathematical tools required to understand the topic of cryptography. Starting
from the classical ciphers to modern day ciphers, the course provides an extensive coverage of the
techniques and methods needed for the proper functioning of the ciphers. The course deals with the
construction and cryptanalysis of block ciphers, stream ciphers and hash functions. The course defines
offers the construction and cryptanalysis of public key ciphers, namely RSA. The key exchange
problem and solutions using the Diffie-Hellman algorithm are discussed. Message Authentication
Codes (MAC) and signature schemes are also detailed. The course deals with modern trends in
asymmetric key cryptography, namely using Elliptic Curves. The course ends with the awareness about
different network attacks and precautions to be taken for the security.
Course Objectives:
1. To know the basics of Cryptography and Network Security.
2. To be able to secure a message over insecure channel by various means.
3. To learn about how to maintain the Confidentiality, Integrity and Availability of a data.
4. To have the knowledge of security requirements for a network against various threats.

Unit -I
Introduction: OSI Security Architecture - Classical Encryption techniques – Cipher Principles –
Data Encryption Standard – Block Cipher Design Principles and Modes of Operation - Evaluation
criteria for AES – AES Cipher – Triple DES – Placement of Encryption Function – Traffic
Confidentiality
Unit –II

Public Key Cryptography Key Management - Diffie-Hellman key Exchange – Elliptic Curve
Architecture and Cryptography - Introduction to Number Theory – Confidentiality using Symmetric
Encryption – Public Key Cryptography and RSA.

Unit -III
Authentication And Hash Function: Authentication requirements – Authentication functions –
Message Authentication Codes – Hash Functions – Security of Hash Functions and MACs –
MD5 message Digest algorithm - Secure Hash Algorithm – RIPEMD – HMAC Digital Signatures –
Authentication Protocols – Digital Signature Standard.

Unit -IV
Network Security Authentication Applications: Kerberos – X.509 Authentication Service – Electronic
Mail Security – PGP – S/MIME - IP Security – Web Security.

Unit –V

System Level Security Intrusion detection – password management – Viruses and related Threats –
Virus Counter measures – Firewall Design Principles – Trusted Systems.

228
TextBook:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security – Principles and Practices”,
Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2003.

References:
1. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
2. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2001.
3. Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Third Edition,
Pearson Education.

Course outcomes :
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1.Understand different encryption techniques

2. Implement basic security algorithms required by any computing system
3. Analyze the vulnerabilities in any computing system to design a security solution
4. Analyze the possible security attacks and their effective countermeasures in real time systems

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 3 3 3 3

229